Comand PDF

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
First, familiarize yourself with your COMAND

system. Read these operating instructions,
particularly the safety and warning notes,
before you drive off.
This will help you to obtain the maximum
pleasure from your COMAND system and to
avoid endangering yourself and others.
The equipment level and functions of your
COMAND system may differ depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

to introduce changes to the following:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
if you have further questions.
The Operator's Manual and all supplements
are integral parts of the vehicle. You should
always keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to
the new owner if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
1725842500 É1725842500*ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 19
Operating safety ................................. 14 System settings .................................. 41
Vehicle functions ................................ 49
Navigation ........................................... 59
Telephone .......................................... 123
Online and Internet functions .......... 157
Audio .................................................. 177
Video .................................................. 223
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 233
SIRIUS Weather ................................ 255

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Audio format, setting

Audio DVD ..................................... 197
360° camera Video DVD ..................................... 229
Displaying images ............................ 56 Autostore ........................................... 181
Switching on/off .............................. 56 AUX (audio)
911 emergency call .......................... 125 Notes/socket ................................ 220
Switching to ................................... 220
A AUX (video)
Active partition (USB devices Setting the volume and sound ....... 230
only) Showing/hiding the menu ............. 230
Selecting ........................................ 198 Switching to ................................... 230
Address book AUX jacks
Browsing ........................................ 147 CD/DVD drive ............................... 236
Calling up ....................................... 147 Avoiding an area ................................ 115
Changing an entry .......................... 150
Connecting a call ........................... 150 B
Creating an entry ........................... 148 Back button ......................................... 27
Deleting an entry ........................... 149 Balance, adjusting ............................... 30
Deleting contacts ........................... 154 Bass, setting ........................................ 30
Details about an entry ................... 149 Bird's-eye view (navigation) ............. 109
Entering characters ......................... 34
Bluetooth®
Entry as a home address ............... 103
Activating/deactivating ................... 45
Hiding contact details .................... 155
Activating audio mode ................... 211
Importing contacts ........................ 152
Conditions (telephone) .................. 125
Introduction ................................... 147
Connecting another mobile
Receiving vCards ........................... 153
phone ............................................ 129
Searching for an entry ................... 148
Connecting audio devices .............. 208
Starting route guidance ................. 151
Device list ...................................... 208
Voice tag ....................................... 151
Entering the passcode ................... 128
Address entry menu ............................ 64
External authorization .................... 129
Adjusting the sound settings
General information ......................... 44
Balance ............................................ 30
Interface ........................................ 124
Alternative Route ................................ 93
Introduction ................................... 124
Audio
Reconnecting an audio device ....... 210
Radio mode ................................... 178
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 127
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Settings ........................................... 44
Switching to (Rear Seat Entertain-
Telephone basic menu ................... 131
ment System) ................................ 243
Telephony ...................................... 125
Audio DVD
Telephony notes ............................ 124
Mode, switching to ........................ 191
Bluetooth® audio basic display ........ 211
Pause function ............................... 193
Brightness, setting (TV, video) ......... 224
Playback options ........................... 198
Buttons on the COMAND control-
Safety notes .................................. 187
ler .......................................................... 27
Setting the audio format ................ 197
Stop function ................................. 193
Index 5
C Characters
Changing the character set .............. 35
Call Changing the language .................... 35
Accepting/ending/rejecting .......... 132 Deleting ........................................... 35
Connecting .................................... 132 Entering ........................................... 36
see Telephone Entering (address book, phone
Call lists book) ............................................... 34
Displaying details ........................... 141 Entering (navigation) ........................ 36
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 141 Moving the cursor ............................ 35
Saving an entry in the address Switching to letters .......................... 35
book .............................................. 141 Clear button ......................................... 27
Car pool lanes ...................................... 62 Color, setting (TV, video) .................. 224
Category list (music search) ............ 200 COMAND
CD Active multicontour seat .................. 52
Copy protection ............................. 200 Basic functions ................................ 29
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 196 Calling up drive status regulator
General information ....................... 200 (ABC) ............................................... 52
Inserting ........................................ 188 Display ............................................. 21
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat Examples of operation ..................... 27
Entertainment System) .................. 242 Importing POIs ............................... 163
Mode, switching to ........................ 191 Menu overview ................................. 22
Multisession .................................. 199 Multicontour seat ............................ 52
Notes on discs ............................... 200 Seat functions .................................. 52
Pause function ............................... 193 Settings ......................................... 175
Player/changer operation Switching on/off .............................. 29
(COMAND) ..................................... 188 COMAND controller ............................. 26
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat COMAND control panel ....................... 25
Entertainment System) .................. 242 COMAND display
Safety notes .................................. 187 Cleaning instructions ....................... 24
Selecting a media type .................. 193 Setting ............................................. 42
Selecting a track ............................ 195 Switching on/off .............................. 24
Sound settings (balance, bass, Compass function ............................. 117
treble) .............................................. 30 Connecting a USB device ................. 191
CD/DVD Contacts
Ejecting (DVD drive) ....................... 189 Deleting ......................................... 154
Inserting (DVD changer) ................ 188 Importing ....................................... 152
Inserting (single DVD drive) ........... 188 Contrast, setting (TV, video) ............ 224
Removing (single DVD drive) .......... 188 Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 200
CD mode Country-specific information (nav-
Playback options ........................... 198 igation) ............................................... 118
Changing direction
Announcement phase ...................... 88
D
Change of direction phase ............... 88
Preparation phase ............................ 88 Data medium
Changing the character set ................ 37 Audio DVD ..................................... 198
Channel presets ................................ 180 CD/DVD ........................................ 200
6 Index
MP3 ............................................... 198 DVD

MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 203 Copy protection ............................. 200
Date format, setting ............................ 43 Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 196
Day design, setting ............................. 42 Inserting ........................................ 188
Deleting Inserting/loading (Rear Seat
Call lists ......................................... 142 Entertainment System) .................. 242
Destination Notes on discs ............................... 200
Assigning a destination to an Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat
address book entry ........................ 105 Entertainment System) .................. 242
Destination (navigation) Selecting a media type .................. 193
Displaying information ..................... 94 Selecting a track ............................ 195
Entering a destination by address .... 63 Sound settings (balance, bass,
Entering a destination using the treble) .............................................. 30
map ................................................. 71 DVD video
Entering a point of interest .............. 76 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 246
Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 72
Entering using Mercedes-Benz E
Apps ................................................ 72
Entering an intersection name ........... 67
Saving ............................................ 105
Entering a street name ....................... 64
Selecting from the destination
Entering the address (example) ......... 63
memory ........................................... 70
Entering the city .................................. 64
Selecting from the list of last des-
Entering the house number ................ 64
tinations ........................................... 70
Selecting storage options .............. 105 Entry
Storing after destination entry ....... 105 Deleting ........................................... 37
Storing during route guidance ....... 105 Saving .............................................. 35
Destination memory (navigation) Example display
Deleting an entry ........................... 106 Audio CD mode .............................. 192
Entering/saving your home MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 204
address ............................................ 69
Previous destinations .................... 107 F
Dialing a number (telephone) ........... 132 Factory setting (reset function) ......... 47
DISC button Fast forward
Activating audio CD/DVD or MP3 Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 196
mode ............................................. 191 Video DVD ..................................... 227
Activating Bluetooth® Audio .......... 212 Fast rewind
Switching on the Media Interface . . 215 Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 196
Switching to the MUSIC REG- Video DVD ..................................... 227
ISTER ............................................. 204 Favorites (Internet) ........................... 173
Display Favorites button .................................. 45
Selecting the design ........................ 42 Frequencies
Displaying the arrival time ................. 94 Adjusting for radio stations ............ 180
Displaying the distance to the des- Fuel
tination ................................................. 94 Displaying consumption ................... 50
Displaying the track and album ....... 197
Dolby® Digital ...................................... 31
Index 7
G iPod®
Alphabetical track selection .......... 218
Google™ local search
Connecting to the Media Inter-
Importing a destination/route ....... 160 face ............................................... 214
Popular Searches ........................... 161 Selecting a category/playlist ......... 216
Search ........................................... 159
iTunes® ............................................... 218
Search history ............................... 162
Selecting a search position ............ 160
Using as the destination ................ 160 L
GPS reception ...................................... 60 Lane recommendations
Gracenote® Media Database ............ 196 Explanation ...................................... 90
Presentation .................................... 90
H Load/eject button ............................. 188
Lumbar support
Harman/kardon® Logic 7® sur- Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 53
round sound system
see Surround sound (harman/
M
kardon® surround sound system)
Heading up (navigation) ................... 109 Map (navigation)
Headphones Adjusting the scale ........................ 108
Changing batteries ........................ 238 Arrival time/distance to the des-
Highway information ........................ 112 tination .......................................... 111
Home address City model ..................................... 112
Entering and saving ......................... 69 Geo-coordinate display .................. 111
Selecting from the destination Heading ......................................... 109
memory ........................................... 70 Information in the display .............. 111
Map settings .................................. 109
I Moving ........................................... 108
North orientation ........................... 109
Incident (traffic report) ....................... 99 Notes ............................................. 108
Indicator lamp Point of interest symbols ............... 110
Remote control .............................. 238 Road display .................................. 111
Interface (USB, iPod®) Saving the crosshair position ......... 109
see Media Interface Showing the map data version ....... 118
Internet Topographical map ........................ 112
Calling up the carousel view .......... 168 Updating ........................................ 118
Conditions for access .................... 158 Updating process ........................... 119
Creating favorites .......................... 173 Media Interface
Entering the URL ............................ 168 Alphabetical track selection .......... 218
Favorites manager ......................... 173 Basic menu .................................... 215
Favorites menu .............................. 174 Connecting an external audio
Menu functions .............................. 171 source ............................................ 214
Opening favorites .......................... 172 Connection options ....................... 213
Selecting favorites ......................... 169 iPod® ............................................. 213
Internet radio Mode ............................................. 213
Calling up ....................................... 167 MP3 player .................................... 214
Searching for stations .................... 167 Notes for the MP3 player ............... 219
8 Index
Selecting categories ...................... 216 N

Selecting folders ............................ 216
Selecting music files ...................... 216 Navigation
Selecting playlists .......................... 216 Adjusting the volume of the navi-
Switching to ................................... 215 gation announcements .................... 30
USB mass storage device .............. 213 Alternative route .............................. 93
Media list ........................................... 193 Avoiding an area ............................ 114
Microphone, switching on/off ......... 134 Basic settings .................................. 62
Mobile phone Blocking a route section affected
Authorizing .................................... 128 by a traffic jam ................................. 92
Compass function .......................... 117
Connecting (Bluetooth® inter-
Destination/route download ......... 162
face) .............................................. 126
Destination memory ...................... 103
De-authorizing ............................... 130
Displaying destination informa-
External authorization .................... 129
tion (arrival time, distance to des-
Registering (authorizing) ................ 128
tination) ........................................... 94
MP3
Entering/saving your home
Bit/sampling rates ......................... 199
address ............................................ 69
Copyright ....................................... 200
Entering a destination ...................... 63
Data medium ................................. 198
Entering a destination by address .... 63
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 196
Entering a destination using the
File systems ................................... 198
map ................................................. 71
Formats ......................................... 199
Entering a point of interest .............. 76
Mode, switching to ........................ 191
Entering characters (character
Notes ............................................. 198
bar) .................................................. 36
Pause function ............................... 193
Freeway information ...................... 112
General notes .................................. 60
Safety notes .................................. 187
GPS reception .................................. 60
Selecting a media type .................. 193
Important safety notes .................... 60
Selecting a track ............................ 195
Lane recommendation ..................... 90
Sound settings (balance, bass,
List of areas ................................... 116
treble) .............................................. 30
Map settings .................................. 108
Multifunction steering wheel
Off-road/off-map (off-road desti-
Adjusting the volume ....................... 29
nation) ............................................. 97
Multisession CD ................................ 199
Previous destinations .................... 107
Music files
Reading out traffic reports ............. 102
Recording ...................................... 204
Repeating announcements .............. 91
MUSIC REGISTER
Route guidance ................................ 87
Deleting all music files ................... 206
Search & Send ................................. 86
Deleting individual music files ....... 207
Selecting a destination from the
Disk space information .................. 206
destination memory ......................... 70
General notes ................................ 203
Selecting a destination from the
list of last destinations ..................... 70
Switching to ................................... 204
Selecting your home address ........... 70
Music search ..................................... 200
Setting options for destination/
route download .............................. 165
Index 9
Setting route options (avoiding: Selecting as the destination ............. 85

highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer- Settings ........................................... 82
ries) ................................................. 62 Visual information ............................ 83
Setting the route type (short Phone book
route, fast route, dynamic route or Adding a number to an address
economic route) ............................... 62 book entry ..................................... 140
Showing/hiding the menu ............... 61 Calling up ....................................... 137
Starting route calculation ................ 69 Creating a new entry ..................... 139
Switching announcements on/off . . . 91 Deleting an entry ........................... 139
Switching to ..................................... 61 Entering characters ......................... 34
Navigation announcements Icon overview ................................. 137
Switching off .................................... 29 Searching for an entry ................... 138
Night View Assist Plus Picture settings (TV, video) .............. 224
Showing the image on the Picture viewer
COMAND display ............................. 56 Displaying pictures ........................ 231
Switching automatic activation Introduction ................................... 231
on/off .............................................. 56 Playback options
North orientation (navigation) ......... 109 Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 198
POI (navigation)
O Category .......................................... 79
Defining the position for the POI
Off-map ................................................ 98
search .............................................. 78
Off-road ................................................ 97
Entering ........................................... 76
Online and Internet functions
Entering a point of interest using
Ending the connection ................... 159
the map ........................................... 81
Establishing/ending the connec-
List ................................................... 79
tion ................................................ 158
ZAGAT® survey service .................... 81
Further Mercedes-Benz Apps ......... 166
see Personal POIs
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website ..... 166
Point of interest icon
Options menu ................................ 164
Setting ........................................... 110
Resetting settings .......................... 166
Point of interest list
Selecting options for the local
With character bar ........................... 80
search ............................................ 164
Previous destinations (navigation) .. 107
Setting options for destination/
route download .............................. 165
Own address ...................................... 103 R
Radio
P Overview ........................................ 178
Setting a station ............................ 180
Pause function
Sound settings (balance, bass,
Audio mode (CD, DVD, MP3) ......... 193
treble) .............................................. 30
Video DVD ..................................... 227
Storing stations ............................. 180
Personal POIs
Switching HD Radio on/off ............ 179
Acoustic notification ........................ 83
Switching on .................................. 178
Calling up the menu ......................... 82
Switching wavebands .................... 179
Displaying on the map ..................... 82
Read-aloud function .......................... 102
Managing categories ........................ 83
Real-time traffic reports ..................... 99
Saving .............................................. 84
Rear-compartment screens .............. 235
10 Index
Rear Seat Entertainment System Lane recommendations ................... 90

Active COMAND source ................. 250 Off-road ........................................... 97
Adjusting sound settings ............... 240 Traffic reports .................................. 99
Adjusting the brightness ................ 241
Adjusting the color ........................ 241 S
Adjusting the contrast ................... 241
Safety notes
AUX mode ...................................... 252
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 187
CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 242
Using the telephone ....................... 124
Changing the batteries .................. 238
Video DVD mode ........................... 224
Changing the picture format .......... 241
SatRadio
Cordless headphones .................... 237
Displaying information ................... 187
Multiple users ................................ 240
Notes ............................................. 182
Operating with the headphones ..... 240
Registering .................................... 183
Picture settings .............................. 241
Selecting a category ...................... 184
System settings ............................. 241
Switching to ................................... 183
Using the main loudspeaker .......... 240
Saving the crosshair position .......... 109
Video DVD mode ........................... 246
Rear view camera Screen
Displaying the image ........................ 55 Selecting for remote operation ...... 235
Receiving vCards ............................... 153 SD memory card
Redialing (telephone) ........................ 133 Ejecting .......................................... 191
Inserting ........................................ 191
Remote control
Search & Send ...................................... 86
Button lighting ............................... 236
Seats
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 235
Reset function ..................................... 47 Active multicontour seat .................. 52
Adjusting the lumbar support
Resetting (factory settings) ............... 47
(COMAND) ....................................... 53
Route
Balance (seat heating) ..................... 54
Estimated time of arrival .................. 94
Multicontour seat ............................ 52
Route (navigation)
Resetting settings ............................ 55
Calling up the "Routes" menu .......... 96
Seat functions (COMAND) ............... 52
Displaying the distance to the des-
Selecting for adjustment
tination ............................................ 94
(COMAND) ....................................... 52
Recording ........................................ 95
Selecting a province ........................... 64
Route overview ................................ 94
Selecting a state .................................. 64
Selecting an alternative route .......... 93
Selecting stations
Setting route options (avoiding:
Radio ............................................. 180
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
Sending DTMF tones ......................... 134
ries) ................................................. 62
Setting the route type (short Settings
route, fast route, dynamic route or Menu overview ................................. 22
economic route) ............................... 62 Picture (COMAND) ......................... 224
Starting calculation .......................... 69 Sound settings ................................. 30
Route demonstration .......................... 95 Setting the audio format
Route guidance Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 249
Canceling ......................................... 92 Setting the language
Continuing ....................................... 92 COMAND ......................................... 45
Destination reached ......................... 92 Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 249
General notes .................................. 87 Setting the night design ..................... 42
Index 11
Setting the text reader speed ............ 44 System settings

Setting the volume Bluetooth® ....................................... 44
Telephone calls ................................ 30 Date ................................................. 42
Video AUX ..................................... 230 Language ......................................... 45
SIRIUS weather display Text reader speed ............................ 44
5-day forecast ................................ 257 Time ................................................. 42
Daily forecast ................................. 256 Time zone ........................................ 43
Detail information .......................... 257 Voice Control System ...................... 44
Information chart ........................... 256
Selecting the area for the weather T
forecast ......................................... 257
Switching on/off ........................... 256 Telephone
Weather map ................................. 260 Accepting/ending a call ................ 132
Sound Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 30
Switching on/off .............................. 29 Calling (outgoing call) .................... 132
Sound menu ......................................... 30 Conference connection .................. 135
Sound mode ......................................... 33 Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 126
Sound settings
De-authorizing a mobile phone ...... 130
Calling up the sound menu .............. 30
Ending an active call ...................... 135
Surround sound ............................... 31
Entering a number ......................... 132
Treble and bass ............................... 30
Entering phone numbers ................ 132
Speed dial list
External authorization (Blue-
Storing a phone book entry in the
speed dial list ................................ 143 tooth®) ........................................... 129
SPLITVIEW ............................................ 38 Function restrictions ...................... 125
Station search ................................... 180 General notes ................................ 124
Stop function Incoming call ................................. 132
Audio DVD ..................................... 193 Making a call ................................. 135
Video DVD ..................................... 227 Making a call via speed dial ........... 133
Storing stations Operating options .......................... 124
Overview of functions .................... 133
Radio ............................................. 180
Reception and transmission vol-
Street View .......................................... 73
ume ............................................... 131
Surround sound ................................... 31
Rejecting/accepting a waiting
Surround sound (harman/kar-
call ................................................. 134
don® surround sound system)
Rejecting a call .............................. 132
Notes ............................................... 31
Safety notes .................................. 124
Switching on/off .............................. 32
Sending DTMF tones ...................... 134
Switching between picture for-
Single call ...................................... 133
mats (TV, video) ................................. 224
Switching hands-free microphone
Switching between summer time
on/off ............................................ 134
and standard time ............................... 43
Text messages (SMS) .................... 144
Switching HD Radio on/off Toggling ......................................... 135
see Radio Using the telephone ....................... 132
Switching the hands-free micro-
see Bluetooth®
phone on/off ..................................... 134
Telephone basic menu
Switching wavebands (radio) ........... 179
Bluetooth® interface ...................... 131
12 Index
Telephone mode V
Redialing ........................................ 133
Telephone number Vehicle
Entering ......................................... 132 Data acquisition ............................... 15
Text messages (SMS) Video
Calling the sender .......................... 146 see Video DVD
Deleting ......................................... 147 Video AUX
Inbox .............................................. 145 Setting the picture ......................... 224
Information and requirements ....... 144 Video DVD
Reading .......................................... 145 Automatic picture shutoff .............. 224
Reading aloud ................................ 145 DVD menu ..................................... 228
Storing sender in address book ..... 147 Fast forward/rewind ...................... 227
Storing the sender as a new Function restrictions ...................... 225
address book entry ........................ 146 Interactive content ........................ 229
Time Notes on discs ............................... 225
Setting ............................................. 44 Operation ....................................... 224
Setting summer/standard time ....... 43 Pause function ............................... 227
Setting the format ............................ 43 Playing conditions .......................... 225
Setting the time ............................... 42 Safety notes .................................. 224
Setting the time/date format .......... 43 Selecting ........................................ 228
Setting the time manually ................ 42 Selecting a film/title ...................... 227
Setting the time zone ....................... 43 Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 227
Tone settings Setting the audio format ................ 229
Balance and fader ............................ 30 Setting the language ...................... 229
Track Setting the picture ......................... 224
Selecting (CD, DVD, MP3) .............. 195 Showing/hiding the control menu .. 226
Selecting using the number key- Showing/hiding the menu ............. 226
pad ................................................ 195 Stop function ................................. 227
Track information .............................. 245 Subtitles ........................................ 229
Traffic jam function ............................. 92 Switching to ................................... 225
Traffic reports Voice Control System
Calling up a list .............................. 100 Settings ........................................... 44
Reading out on route ..................... 102 Volume, adjusting
Real-time traffic report .................. 101 COMAND ......................................... 29
Treble, adjusting (sound) .................... 30 Navigation messages ....................... 30
True Image™ ........................................ 33
TV W
Automatic picture shutoff .............. 224 Waypoints
Picture settings .............................. 224 Accepting waypoints for the route ... 76
Sound settings (balance, bass, Creating ........................................... 73
treble) .............................................. 30 Editing .............................................. 75
Entering ........................................... 73
U Searching for a gas station when
Updating the digital map .................. 118 the fuel level is low .......................... 76
Weather Band
USB
Searching for a channel ................. 181
see Media Interface
Switching on .................................. 181
Index 13
Weather map (SIRIUS)

Calling up ....................................... 260
Legend ........................................... 265
Moving ........................................... 260
Showing/hiding layers ................... 261
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 260
Time stamp .................................... 265
Weather memory (SIRIUS)
Selecting an area ........................... 259
Storing an area .............................. 259
Website
Add to favorites ............................. 172
Z
ZAGAT® rating service ........................ 81
14 Operating safety
Important safety notes Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
Rnarrow bridges
G WARNING COMAND can give incorrect navigation com-
Modifications to electronic components, their mands if the actual street/traffic situation
software as well as wiring can impair their does not correspond with the digital map's
function and/or the function of other net- data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor
worked components. In particular, systems all routes in an area. For example, a route may
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a have been diverted or the direction of a one-
result, these may no longer function as way street may have changed.
intended and/or jeopardize the operating For this reason, you must always observe
safety of the vehicle. There is an increased road and traffic rules and regulations during
risk of an accident and injury. your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- ulations always have priority over the sys-
tronic components or their software. You tem's driving recommendations.
should have all work to electrical and elec- Navigation announcements are intended to
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified direct you while driving without diverting your
specialist workshop. attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- sulting the map display for directions. Look-
tronics, the general operating permit is ren- ing at the icons or map display can distract
dered invalid. you from traffic conditions and driving, and
G WARNING increase the risk of an accident.
If you operate information systems and com- Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- (approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers
cle while driving, you will be distracted from a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
traffic conditions. You could also lose control per second.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation
Only operate the equipment when the traffic exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
situation permits. If you are not sure that this equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple-
to traffic conditions and operate the equipment C to OET65.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that is deemed to comply without
You must observe the legal requirements for maximum permissive exposure evaluation
the country in which you are currently driving (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be
when operating COMAND. installed and operated with at least 8 inches
COMAND calculates the route to the destina- (20 cm) and more between the radiator and a
tion without taking account of the following, person's body (excluding extremities: hands,
for example: wrists, feet and legs.)
Rtraffic
lights
Rstop and yield signs
Rmerging lanes
Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no
stopping zone
Operating safety 15
Declarations of conformity i Roof antenna functionality (telephone,

satellite radio, GPS) can be affected by the
Vehicle components which receive use of roof carrier systems.
and/or transmit radio waves Attaching metalized retrofit film to the
i USA only: The wireless devices of this windshield may affect radio reception and
vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC have a negative impact on all other anten-
Rules. Operation is subject to the following nas (e.g. emergency antenna) in the vehicle
two conditions: interior.
1) These devices may not cause interfer- i Therefore, have all work on or modifica-
ence, and tions to electronic components carried out
2) These devices must accept any interfer- at a qualified specialist workshop. This
ence, including interference that may workshop should have the necessary spe-
cause undesired operation of the device. cialist knowledge and tools to carry out the
Changes or modifications not expressly work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
approved by the party responsible for com- mends that you use an authorized
pliance could void the user's authority to Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In
operate the equipment. particular, work relevant to safety or on
safety-related systems must be carried out
i Canada only: The wireless devices of this at a qualified specialist workshop.
vehicle comply with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation i Protection against theft: this device is
is subject to the following two conditions: equipped with technical provisions to pro-
1) These devices may not cause interfer- tect it against theft. Further information on
ence, and protection against theft can be obtained
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
2) These devices must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Data stored in the vehicle
A wide range of electronic components in

Correct use
your vehicle contain data memories.
Observe the following information when using These data memories temporarily or perma-
COMAND: nently store technical information about:
RThe vehicle's operating state
Rthe safety notes in this manual
RIncidents
Rtraffic rules and regulations
RMalfunctions
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
i Work improperly carried out on electronic system or the surroundings.
components or systems (e.g. radio, DVD
These include, for example:
changer) and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Even sys- Roperating conditions of system compo-
tems that have not been modified could be nents, e.g. fluid levels
affected because the electronic systems Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of
are connected. Electronic malfunctions its individual components, e.g. number of
can seriously jeopardize the operational wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in
safety of your vehicle.
Z
16 Operating safety
movement, lateral acceleration, accelera- Further additional functions that have been
tor pedal position contractually agreed upon with the customer
Rmalfunctions and defects in important sys- allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes the vehicle as well. The additional functions
Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions include, for example, vehicle location in case
in special driving situations, e.g. air bag of an emergency.
deployment, intervention of stability
control systems
Rambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-
Qualified specialist workshop
ture
Read the information on qualified specialist
This data is of an exclusively technical nature workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
and can be used to:
Rassist in recognizing and rectifying mal-
functions and defects Information on copyright
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
General information
dent
Roptimize vehicle function Information on licenses for free and Open
Source software used in your vehicle and in
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
the electronic components can be found on
movements.
this website: http://www.mercedes-
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- benz.com/opensource.
mation can be read from the event data mem-
ory and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example: Registered trademarks
Rrepair services Registered trademarks:
Rservice processes
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Rwarranties
Bluetooth® SIG Inc.
Rquality assurance
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
It is read by employees of the service network RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
(including manufacturers) using special diag- of DOLBY Laboratories.
nostic devices. More detailed information is RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
obtained from it, if required.
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
After a malfunction has been rectified, the
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
information is deleted from the malfunction
memory or is continually overwritten. Prince.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-
When operating the vehicle, situations are
conceivable in which this technical data, in marks of Apple Inc.
connection with other information (if neces- RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-
sary, under consultation with an authorized man International Industries.
expert), could be traced to a person. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-
Examples include: istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-
Raccident reports tion.
Rdamages RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
to the vehicle
Rwitness statements
XM Radio Inc.
Operating safety 17
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-

uity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
Your COMAND equipment
These operating instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available
for your COMAND system at the time of pur-
chase. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Please note that your COMAND system
may not be equipped with all the features
described. This also applies to safety-relevant
systems and functions. Therefore, the equip-
ment on your COMAND system may differ
from that in the descriptions and illustrations.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some COMAND functions

are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle
is in motion. You will notice this, for example
because either you will not be able to select
certain menu items or COMAND will display
a message to this effect.
Z
18
19
Your COMAND equipment .................. 20

COMAND operating system ............... 20
Using COMAND ................................... 28
At a glance
Basic COMAND functions ................... 29
Character entry (telephony) ............... 34
Character entry (navigation) .............. 36
SPLITVIEW ........................................... 38
20 COMAND operating system
Your COMAND equipment You can call up the main functions:

Rusing the corresponding function buttons
These operating instructions describe all the Rusing the main function bar in the COMAND
At a glance
standard and optional equipment for your display

COMAND system, as available at the time of Rusing the remote control
going to print. Country-specific differences
are possible. Please note that your
COMAND system may not be equipped with
all the features described.
COMAND operating system

Overview
: COMAND display (Y page 21)

; COMAND control panel with a single DVD
drive or DVD changer
= COMAND controller (Y page 26)
You can use COMAND to operate the follow-
ing main functions:
Rthe navigation system
Rthe audio function
Rthe telephone function
Rthe video function
Rthe system settings
Rthe online and Internet functions
Rthe Digital Operator's Manual
(available depending on the vehicle model)

COMAND operating system 21
COMAND display
Display overview
At a glance
Example display for radio
: Status bar
; Calls up the audio menu
= Main function bar
? Display/selection window
A Radio menu bar
Status bar : displays the time, the current mobile phone network provider and the signal
strength.
The main functions – navigation, audio, telephone and video – feature additional menus. This
is indicated by triangle ;. The following table lists the available menu items.
Main function bar = allows you to call up the desired main function. When the main function
is activated, it is identifiable by the white lettering.
In the example, the radio mode is switched on within the audio main function, display/selec-
tion window ? is active.
Menu bar A allows you to operate the radio functions.
Menu overview
Navi Audio Telephone Video System Symbol ®

At a glance
Route settings FM/AM Telephone Video DVD Calls up the Calls the
radio (using system Digital
HD Radio™) menu Operator's
Manual
(available
depending
on the vehi-
cle model)
Map settings Satellite Address Aux Calls up
radio book COMAND
and Internet
Personal POIs Disc Calls up the
weather
service SIR-
IUS
Weather
Messages Memory Calls up the
(street name card Mercedes-
announcements, Benz Mobile
acoustic informa- website
tion during calls,
audio fadeout,
reserve fuel level)
O Activates/ MUSIC
deactivates alter- REGISTER
native routes
Avoids an area USB stor-
age device
SIRIUS service Bluetooth
Audio
Map version Media Inter-
face
Aux
System menu overview
System Time SPLITVIEW Consump- Seat Display off
At a glance
tion
Display settings O Operates Calls up the Changes Switches
Switches COMAND fuel con- the driver/ off the dis-
the auto- functions sumption front- play
matic time from the display passenger
settings passenger seat set-
on/off side tings
Text reader speed Sets the
time zone
Voice-operated Switches to
control settings summer
time
Rear view camera Manual
time setting
Language Sets the
time/date
format
Favorites button
Activates/deacti-
vates Bluetooth®
Automatic volume
adjustment
Imports/exports
data
Resets COMAND
i Delete your
personal data
using this func-
tion, for example
before selling
your vehicle.
If equipped with the rear view camera: when the function is activated and COMAND is
switched on, the image from the rear view camera is automatically shown in the COMAND
display when reverse gear is engaged.
i If the 360° Camera menu item is displayed, Display Off can be called up under Sys‐
tem.
tem
At a glance
Switching the COMAND display on/off

X Press the W function button.
or
X Select System in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
In both cases, the system menu appears.
X To switch off: select Display Off and
press W to confirm.
X To switch on: press one of the function
buttons, e.g. W, Ø or the % back
button.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the COMAND display. The
display has a very sensitive high-gloss sur-
face; there is a risk of scratching. If you
have to clean the screen, however, use a
mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free
cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a
commercially available microfiber cloth and
cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage. Then, dry the surface with a dry
microfiber cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or
abrasive cleaning agents. These could dam-
age the display surface.
COMAND control panel
At a glance
Function Page Function Page
: Switches to radio mode 178 A Load/eject button
Switches wavebands 179 8 Single DVD drive 188
Switches to satellite radio 183 V DVD changer 188
; Switches to navigation B Selects stations via the sta-
mode 61 tion search function 180
Shows the menu system 61 Rewinds 196
= Press h repeatedly Selects the previous track 195
• Switches to the audio CD, C Disc slot
audio DVD and MP3 mode 191 • Loads CDs/DVDs 188
• Switches to memory card • Ejects CDs/DVDs 189
mode 191
• Updates the digital map 118
• Switches to MUSIC REG-
ISTER 204 D Selects stations via the sta-
• Switches to USB storage tion search function 180
device mode 191 Fast forward 196
• Switches to Media Inter- Selects the next track 195
face or audio AUX mode 215 E Clear button
• Switches to Bluetooth® • Deletes characters 37
audio mode 211
• Deletes an entry 37
? Calls up the telephone
basic menu:
• Telephony via the Blue-
tooth® interface 131
Function Page Function Page

F Number pad H SD memory card slot 191
At a glance
• Selects stations via the I Calls up the system menu 42

station presets 180
• Stores stations manually 180 J Accepts a call 132
• Mobile phone authoriza- Dials a number 132
tion 128 Redials 133
• Telephone number entry 132 Accepts a waiting call 134
• Sends DTMF tones 134 K Switches the sound on or
• Character entry 36 off 29
• Selects a location for the Switches the hands-free
weather forecast from the microphone on/off 134
memory 259 Cancels the text message
z Displays the current read-aloud function 145
track being played 197 Switches off navigation
g Selects stations by announcements 29
entering the frequency
manually 180 L Rejects a call 132
g Selects a track 195 Ends an active call 135
Rejects a waiting call 134
G Switches COMAND on/off 29
Adjusts the volume 29
COMAND controller You can:

Rcall up menus or lists
Overview
Rscroll within menus or lists and
Rexit menus or lists
Operation
: COMAND controller
You can use the COMAND controller to select
the menu items in the COMAND display.
Example: operating the COMAND controller
The COMAND controller can be: i For AMG vehicles: the COMAND control-
Rpressed briefly or pressed and held W ler is configured with the : and ; but-
tons.
At a glance
Rturned clockwise or counter-clockwise
cVd
Rslid left or right XVY
Back button
Rslid forwards or backwards ZVÆ You can use the k button to exit a menu
Rslid diagonally aVb
or to call up the basic display of the current
operating mode.
X To exit the menu: briefly press the k
Example of operation
back button.
In the instructions, operating sequences are COMAND changes to the next higher menu
described as follows: level in the current operating mode.
X Press the $ button. X To call up the basic display: press and
Radio mode is activated. hold the k back button.
X Select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning COMAND changes to the basic display of
cVd the COMAND controller and press the current operating mode.
W to confirm.
X Confirm Station List by pressing W. Clear button
The station list appears. X To delete individual characters: briefly
press the 2 clear button.
X To delete an entire entry: press and hold
Buttons on the COMAND controller the 2 clear button.
Overview
Seat function button
You can use the T button to call up the
following seat functions:
RMulticontour seat (with 4-way lumbar sup-
port)
RActive multicontour seat (dynamic seat and
massage function)
RBalance (seat heating distribution)
Favorites button
: Back button (Y page 27)
You can assign predefined functions to
; Clear button (Y page 27)
the ; favorites button and call them up by
= Seat function button (Y page 52) pressing the button (Y page 45).
? Favorites button (Y page 45)
i If your vehicle does not have the seat

function button, it will have two Favorites
buttons.
28 Using COMAND
Using COMAND Selecting the menu of a main function

Selecting a main function
At a glance
Address entry menu

: Main function bar
Situation: switching from navigation mode
(address entry menu) to the system settings.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Destination by sliding V Æ and Example display for audio CD mode and audio
menu (below)
turning c V d the COMAND controller and
: Calls up the audio menu
press W to confirm.
X Select Address Entry and press W to If one of the navigation, audio, telephone or
confirm. video main functions is switched on, trian-
The address entry menu appears. gle : appears next to the entry in the main
function bar. You can now select an associ-
X Slide Z V the COMAND controller and ated menu.
switch to main function bar :. The example describes how to call up the
X Select System in the main function bar by audio menu from audio CD mode (an audio
turning c V d the COMAND controller and CD is playing).
press W to confirm. X Select Audio in the main function bar by
The system menu appears. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
The Audio menu appears.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
audio mode.
X Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio
Radio, by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Radio mode is activated.
Basic COMAND functions 29
Selecting a menu item i Even if the sound is switched off, you will
still hear navigation system announce-
ments.
At a glance
Switching off navigation announce-
ments
X Navigation announcements: press the
8 button during the announcement.
Switching navigation announcements

back on
X Select the station by turning c V d the X Press the 8 button again.
COMAND controller and press W to con- The navigation announcements are active
firm. again:
The station is set. RifCOMAND is switched off/on with the
q control knob
Ror after starting route guidance
Basic COMAND functions
Switching COMAND on/off
X Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
When you switch on COMAND, a warning Adjusting the volume for the audio or
message will appear. COMAND calls up the video source
previously selected menu.
X Turn the q control knob.
If you switch off COMAND, playback of the
current audio or video source will also be or
switched off. X Press the W or X button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
The volume of the currently selected audio
Switching the sound on or off or video source changes.
You can also adjust the volume for the fol-
Audio/video source sound
lowing:
XPress the 8 button on the COMAND RNavigation announcements
controller or on the multifunction steering RPhone calls
wheel.
Rvoice output of the Voice Control System
The sound from the respective audio or
video source is switched on or off. (see the separate operating instructions)
i When the sound is switched off, you will
see the , symbol in the status bar. If you
change the audio or video source or change
the volume, the sound is automatically
switched on.
30 Basic COMAND functions
Adjusting the volume for navigation X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
announcements cVd the COMAND controller and press
During a navigation announcement: W to confirm.
At a glance
You can now set the treble, bass and bal-

X Turn the q control knob. ance for radio mode.
or
X Press the W or X button on the mul- Adjusting treble and bass
Adjusting the volume for phone calls

You can adjust the volume for hands-free
mode during a telephone call.
X Turn the q control knob.
or
X Press the W or X button on the mul-
Setting the bass
Adjusting the sound settings X Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
Calling up the sound menu and press W to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
The setting is saved.
Adjusting balance and fader
You can make various sound settings for the

different audio and video sources. This means
that it is possible to set more bass for radio
mode than for audio CD mode, for example.
You can call up the respective sound menu
from the menu of the desired mode.
The example describes how to call up the
sound menu in radio mode.
Setting the balance
X Press the $ button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the With the balance function, you can control
last station played on the last waveband. whether the sound is louder on the driver's or
front-passenger side.
The fader function is used to control whether Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital
the sound is louder in the front or the rear of audio formats)
the vehicle. RAUX
At a glance
You can adjust the fader depending on the Because some DVDs contain both stereo and
vehicle model. multichannel audio formats, it may be neces-
Equipped with Bang & Olufsen sound sys- sary to set the audio format (Y page 229).
tem: for the best sound focus, choose the Discs which support the audio formats men-
setting 0. tioned have the following logos:
X Select Bal/Fad (balance/fader) in the
sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the
firm.
Surround
General notes
If your vehicle is equipped with surround
sound, you can use one of two sound sys-
tems:
Rharman/kardon® Logic 7® Surround
Sound system
The harman/kardon®Logic 7® Surround
Sound system allows you to set the opti-
mum surround sound in the vehicle interior
(Y page 32).
RBang & Olufsen sound system
(Y page 33)
Both sound systems are available for the fol-
lowing operating modes:
Rradio (FM only)
Rsatelliteradio
Raudio CD
Raudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby Digi-
tal audio formats)
RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB
storage device)
RMedia Interface
RBluetooth® audio mode
32 Basic COMAND functions
harman/kardon® Logic 7® Surround when Logic7® is switched on, the balance

Sound system should be set to the center of the vehicle
interior.
At a glance
You will achieve the best sound results by

playing high-quality audio and video DVDs.
MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s.
Surround sound playback does not func-
tion for mono signal sources, such as for
AM radio mode.
If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel,
you should switch off Logic7®, since it may
otherwise switch dynamically between
stereo and mono and cause temporary
sound distortions.
On some stereo recordings, the sound
characteristics may differ from conven-
tional stereo playback.
i The Logic7® On function creates a sur-
round sound experience for every
passenger when playing stereo recordings,
for example. It enables optimum playback
of music and films on CD, audio DVD or
The example describes how to set the sur- video DVD with multichannel audio for-
round sound for radio mode. mats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital.
X To switch surround sound on/off: press This results in sound characteristics like
the $ button. those intended by the sound engineer
The radio display appears. You will hear the when the original was recorded.
last station played on the last waveband. i If you select Logic7® Off
Off, the sound sys-
X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning tem plays the tracks as stored on the
cVd the COMAND controller and press medium. Due to the design of the
W to confirm. passenger compartment, an optimum
audio experience cannot be guaranteed for
X Select Surround and press W to confirm.
all passengers.
X Select Logic7® On or Logic7® Off by turn-
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Depending on your selection, surround
sound is switched on or off and the menu
is exited.
X To exit the menu without saving: press
the k back button or slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
i Please note the following: for the opti-
mum audio experience for all passengers
Bang & Olufsen sound system
At a glance
: Current position of the sound setting
You can optimize the sound in the vehicle with For the optimum musical enjoyment, you can
the Bang & Olufsen sound system and the focus the sound image precisely on one seat.
True Image
Image™ sound technology. The Sound This means you are right at the center of the
Mode function enables you to focus the listening experience, with all system param-
selected sound setting within the vehicle. eters being precisely calculated for the
selected position. The result is authentic
The example describes how to set the opti-
music reproduction inside the vehicle.
mum sound for radio mode.
Focusing the sound setting
Selecting the sound setting for True
Image™ X Press the $ button.
X Press a number key, such as $. X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
X Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
W to confirm.
X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to con-
W to confirm.
X Select Bang&Olufsen and press W to con-
firm.
A menu appears. A # dot marks the current
firm.
A menu appears. A # dot marks the current setting for Sound Mode.
setting for True Image™. Depending on the vehicle model series
X Select reference or surround and press X Select left
left, all or rear and press W to
W to confirm. confirm.
Rreference or
This setting provides a crisp, clear, luxury X Select left
left, all or right and press W to
high-end sound setting for a studio atmos- confirm.
phere in your vehicle. X To exit the menu: press the k back
Rsurround button or slide XVY the COMAND control-
This setting enables a wide-ranging sound ler.
experience for playing music and videos.
i Please note the following: you will achieve
the best sound results on your Bang & Oluf-
sen sound system by playing high-quality
audio DVDs and CDs.
MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least
224 kbit/s.
34 Character entry (telephony)
When playing using an iPod®, the bit rate X Select c and confirm W with the COMAND
should also be at least 224 kbit/s. controller.
For optimum playback quality: The letter c is added to S in the data field.
At a glance
X Repeat the process until the name has

X Deactivate the “EQ” setting on the
been entered in full.
iPod®.
Other input menu functions:
Surround-sound playback does not func-
RDeleting a character/an entry
tion for mono signal sources, such as the
medium wave range (MW) in radio mode. (Y page 35)
RSwitching between upper/lower-case let-
On some stereo recordings, the sound
characteristics may differ from conven- ters (Y page 35)
tional stereo playback. RChanging the character set (Y page 35)
RMoving the cursor to the next data field
(Y page 35)
Character entry (telephony) X To enter a phone number: select the dig-
Example: entering characters its one by one in the corresponding data

field by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
firm.
Switching data fields
: * To switch the character bar to upper-

case/lowercase letters
; p To switch the character bar from
uppercase/lowercase letters to dig-
its
= B To change the language of the char-
acter bar : Cursor in the next data field
? 2 To delete a character/an entry ; To store the entry
= 4 and 5 symbols to select a data field
The example describes how to enter the sur-
name “Schulz”. In the input menu, if you want to enter a first
X Call up the input menu with data fields name after you have entered a surname, for
(Y page 139). example, proceed as follows to switch
X Select S and confirm W with the COMAND
between the data fields:
controller. Option 1
S appears in the data field. X Select 4 or 5 in the character bar and
press W to confirm.
The input menu shows the data field
selected.
Character entry (telephony) 35
Option 2: XSelect the p symbol and press W to

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat- confirm.
edly until the character bar disappears. RABC (upper/lower case)
At a glance
X Select the data field by sliding ZVÆ and R123 (digits)
press W to confirm. ROther (special characters such as @, €,

etc.)
Storing the entry Moving the cursor to the next data field
X After making an entry in the input
menu, e.g. to create a new
entry(Y page 139): select the ¬ sym-
bol in the character bar by turning cVd the
firm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
Further functions available in the

character bar : Cursor (repositioned)
Changing the language of the character ; 2 and 3 symbol to reposition the cur-
bar sor
While making an entry in the input menu While making an entry in the input menu
(Y page 139): (Y page 139):
X Select B and press W to confirm. X Select the 2 or 3 symbol and press W
to confirm.
X Select a language by turning cVd the
Deleting a character/an entry
firm.
While making an entry in the input menu
Switching the character bar to letters (Y page 139):
While making an entry in the input menu, e.g. X To delete characters: press the $ but-
to create a new entry (Y page 139): ton on the control panel.

X Select the * (upper case) or E or
(lower case) symbol and press W to con- X Select the 2 symbol by sliding VÆ and
firm. turning cVd the COMAND controller and

press W to confirm.
Changing the character set or
X Press the 2 button next to the
While making an entry in the input menu
(Y page 139): COMAND controller.
36 Character entry (navigation)
X To delete an entry: press and hold the

$ button on the control panel until the
entire entry has been deleted.
At a glance
or
X Select the 2 symbol and press and hold
W the COMAND controller until the entire
entry has been deleted.
or
X Press and hold the 2 button next to the
COMAND controller until the entire entry is
deleted. : Character N entered by the user
; Characters automatically added by
COMAND ANTICOKE
Character entry (navigation) = List entry that most closely resembles the
current entry by the user
General information ? Switches to the selection list
The following paragraphs describe how to A Deletes an entry
enter characters using city input for NEW B Characters not currently available
YORK as an example.
C Characters currently available
If you want to use the address entry menu to
D Currently selected character
enter a city, a street or a house number, for
example, COMAND offers you: E Character bar
Ra list with a character bar (option 1) F Cancels an entry
Ra selection list (option 2) G List
You can enter the characters using either the Entering characters using the character
character bar or the number keypad. In the bar
selection list, you select an entry to copy it to X Select N by turning c V d the COMAND
the address entry menu. controller and press W to confirm.
List G shows all available city names
Option 1: city list/street list with beginning with N. The list entry most closely
character bar resembling user's current entry = is
always highlighted at the top of the list
X Call up the city list with character bar (NANTICOKE
NANTICOKE in the example).
(Y page 64). All characters currently entered by the user
The alphabetically sorted city list shows the are shown in black (letter N : in the exam-
first available entries.
ple). Letters added by COMAND are shown
in gray ; (ANTICOKE
ANTICOKE in the example).
Character bar E shows the letters still
available for selection in black C. These
can be selected. In the example, the letter
O is highlighted D. The characters availa-
ble depend on the entry made by the user
so far and the data contained in the digital
Character entry (navigation) 37
map. Characters that are no longer availa- X Press the 2 button next to the
ble B are shown in gray. COMAND controller.
or
At a glance
X Select the 2 symbol in the character bar
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
firm.
X To delete an entry: press and hold the
$ button on the control panel.
or
X Press and hold the 2 button next to the
COMAND controller until the entire entry is
X Select E, W, space, Y in order and confirm deleted.
each with W. or
Entering characters using the number X Select the 2 symbol in the character bar
keypad and press and hold W the COMAND con-
X To enter the letter N: press the p num- troller until the entire entry is deleted.
ber key twice in quick succession. X To cancel an entry: select the & symbol
The character appears at the bottom of the in the bottom left of the character bar and
display when the key is pressed. The first press W to confirm.
available letter is highlighted. or
You see which characters you can enter X Press the k back button.
with that key. Each time the key is pressed, The address entry menu appears.
the next character is selected.
Example: p key: X To accept the first list entry: press and
hold W the COMAND controller until the
Rpress once = M address entry menu appears.
Rpress twice = N The accepted list entry is shown there.
Rpress three times = O
X Wait until the character display goes out.

The entries matching your input are shown Calling up the list as a selection list
in the list. You can switch from the list of cities with the
XEnter E, W, space, Y with the corresponding character bar to the list of cities as a selection
keys. list at any point during character entry.
i The space is entered using number key X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-
9. edly until the city list appears as a selection
list.
Select the desired city from the selection
Further functions in the list with char- list.
acter bar or
X To delete characters: press the $ but- X Select¬in the character bar by turning
ton on the control panel. cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
38 SPLITVIEW
If there are several entries for a city or if sev- To do so, use the special radio headphones.
eral cities of the same name are stored, then Using the headphones on the correct sides
¬ is highlighted in the character bar. ensures an optimal sound.
At a glance
X Press W the COMAND controller. You can connect your own headphones to a
special headphones jack. You can use the
remote control to operate them.
Option 2: city list as selection list
Points to remember
RYou can only adjust the volume for the
headphones supplied, directly on the head-
phones.
ROnly entertainment functions, i.e. audio,
TV, video and Internet, for example, may be
used with SPLITVIEW.
RDifferent media can be used on the driver
and front-passenger sides as long as they
use different media sources. Example: if a
COMAND either shows the selection list auto- medium from the DVD changer is being
matically or you can call up the selection list played on the driver's side. then another
from the list with the character bar. medium that is also played from the DVD
The example shows the selection list after the changer cannot be played separately on
city NEW YORK has been entered. The entry is the front-passenger side. However, other
highlighted automatically. media can be used at the same time on the
front-passenger side, including radio,
X Confirm NEW YORK by pressing W the
memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, Media
COMAND controller. Interface, USB or AUX.
The address entry menu appears. You can RIf you use the same medium on both sides,
now enter a street, for example.
you can both carry out the respective set-
Observe the information on destination entry tings.
(Y page 63). RInternet use is only available at any one
time to the driver or the front passenger.
A corresponding message appears on the
SPLITVIEW display.
Method of operation RInternet can only be used, if it is set and
connected via a telephone on the driver's
SPLITVIEW allows you to simultaneously use
side.
different COMAND functions on the front-
RThe multifunction steering wheel can only
passenger side and on the driver's side. Dif-
ferent content is seen depending on your per- be used for functions which relate to the
spective when viewing the display. driver's side.
The "Navi" function, for example, can be used
from the driver's side while a video is watched
from the front-passenger side.
SPLITVIEW is operated with the remote
control from the front-passenger side.
SPLITVIEW 39
Switching SPLITVIEW on/off side are saved for approximately 30 minutes

longer. After this period, reactivation on the
front-passenger side means that the settings
At a glance
from the driver's side will be used.
Transferring the driver's website

X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select Settings
from the main function bar by turning
W to confirm.
X Select ; in the menu bar and confirm.
Switching on SPLITVIEW SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-
X Select System in the main function bar by play, and display ; switches to off
off.
turning c V d the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-
play, and display ; switches to offoff.
The front passenger sees the display of the
function last activated. If the switch-on
time was longer than 30 minutes previ-
ously, the display from the driver's side is
shown.
The front passenger can now call up the
COMAND functions with the remote X Select ® in the main function bar with the
control. remote control.
A menu appears with the following options:
Switching off SPLITVIEW
ROperator's Manual
X Select ; in the menu bar by turning
REnter URL
RInternet Favorites
W to confirm.
RMercedes-Benz Apps
SPLITVIEW symbol : disappears from the
display. Display ; switches to On
On. RInternet Radio
RMercedes Mobile Website
i If COMAND has already been switched RTransfer website from the driver
on, you can also use the remote control to
X Select Transfer website from the
switch SPLITVIEW on and off. Make sure
that the SPLITVIEW symbol is set on the driver with the remote control.
remote control thumbwheel (Y page 235). You see the last website called up by the
driver.
The SPLITVIEW display remains on for approx-
imately 30 minutes after the SmartKey has
been turned to position 0 in the ignition lock.
After this time or after the SmartKey has been
removed, the settings on the front-passenger
40 SPLITVIEW
Transferring a destination to the

driver
At a glance
Using SPLITVIEW you can select a destination

from the front-passenger side and transfer
this to the driver's side.
X To switch on SPLITVIEW: select Settings
from the main function bar by turning
W to confirm.
SPLITVIEW symbol : appears in the dis-
play, and display ; switches to off
off.
X Select ® in the main function bar with the
remote control.
A menu appears.
X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps with the
remote control.
You see the selection of Mercedes-Benz
Apps.
X Select Google Local Search with the
remote control.
Using a menu you can select a category for
the destination.
X Select At Current Position,
Position for exam-
ple.
Using a menu you can determine the type
of search inquiry.
X Select Enter a search term:, term: for exam-
ple.
An input field appears.
X Enter the destination with the remote
control and confirm the entry with b.
You see the results list from Google.
X Select the exact destination with the
remote control.
An additional menu appears.
X Select Navigate to. to
X A window appears on the driver's side with
the message: Accept the navigation
data from Mercedes-Benz Apps?
41

Display settings .................................. 42
Time settings ....................................... 42
Text reader settings ............................ 44
Voice Control System settings .......... 44
System settings
Bluetooth® settings ............................ 44
Setting the system language ............. 45
Assigning a favorites button .............. 45
Importing/exporting data .................. 46
Reset function ..................................... 47
42 Time settings
Your COMAND equipment design by manually selecting day or night

design, or opt for an automatic setting.
These operating instructions describe all the X Press W.
standard and optional equipment for your X Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND system, as available at the time of COMAND controller and press W to con-
System settings
firm.
X Select Display and press W to confirm.
all the features described. X Select Day Mode,
Mode Night Mode or Auto‐
matic by turning cVd the COMAND con-
troller and press W to confirm.
Display settings A dot indicates the current setting.
Setting the brightness Design Explanation
The brightness detected by the display light Day Mode The display is set perma-
sensor affects the setting options for this nently to day design.
function.
Night Mode The display is set perma-
nently to night design.
Automatic If the Automatic setting
is selected, COMAND
evaluates the readings
from the automatic vehi-
cle light sensor and auto-
matically switches
between the display
designs.
X Press W.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the Time settings
firm. General information
X Select Display and press W to confirm. If COMAND is equipped with a navigation sys-
X Select Brightness and press W to con- tem and has GPS reception, COMAND auto-
firm. matically sets the time and date. You can
change the time in minute increments. The
X Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the
date can also be changed.
firm. i If you adjust the time in minute incre-
ments, any time zone settings and settings
for changing between summer and stand-
Display design ard time are lost. Switching between
summer and standard time (Y page 43).
Your COMAND display features optimized
designs for operation during daytime and
night-time hours. You can customize the
Time settings 43
i The following navigation system functions X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND
require the time, time zone and summer/ controller and press W to confirm.
standard time to be set correctly in order
X Select Time Zone and press W to confirm.
to work properly:
A list of countries or time zones appears.
Rroute guidance on routes with time- The # dot indicates the current setting.
System settings
dependent traffic guidance
X Select the country or time zone by turning
Rcalculation of expected time of arrival
i With this function, you can set the time W to confirm.
for every display in the vehicle. A time zone list may also be displayed,
depending on the country selected.
X Select the time zone and press W to con-
Setting the time/date format firm.
X Press the W button. The entry for the Automatic Time Set‐
tings is accepted.
X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm. Subsequent operation depends on whether
the automatic changeover function to
X Select Format and press W to confirm. summer time is available.
The # symbols show the current settings. X To change manually: select ON or OFF and
X Set the format by turning c V d the press W to confirm.

COMAND controller and press W to con- X To change to automatic time: select
firm. Automatic and press W to confirm.
The entry for the Automatic Time Set‐
Abbreviation Meaning
tings is accepted.
DD . MM . YY Day . Month . Year X To switch the automatic time setting
(date format, two digits) off/on: press the W button.
MM / DD / YYYY Month/Day/Year X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND
date format, year (all controller and press W to confirm.

four digits) X Press W to confirm the Automatic Time
Settings.
Settings
YY / MM / DD Year/Month/Day
Switch the automatic time setting off ª or
date format, year (two on again O.
digits)
To switch on: the menu item is switched
HH : MM (24 Hours : Minutes on as the default setting. If the Automatic
hrs) (24 hour time format) Time Settings is switched off and you
switch it on again, the last settings for the
HH : MM (AM/PM) Hours : Minutes time zone and summer time changeover
(AM/PM time format) are selected.
To switch off: the time zone is deselected
and the summer time is switched off. If
Adjusting the time zone and switching Automatic is set for the summer time
to Daylight Savings Time (Summer) changeover, a prompt will appear asking
X Press W. whether this should be maintained.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
44 Bluetooth® settings
Setting the time manually X Press W.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the
firm.
X Select Voice Control and press W to
System settings
confirm.
X Select Help Window and press W to con-
firm.
You have switched the help window on
O or off ª.
X Press the W button.

X Select Time by turning c V d the COMAND Individualization
controller and press W to confirm. Using individualization, you can fine-tune the
X Select Set Time Manually and press W Voice Control System to your own voice and
to confirm. thus improve voice recognition. See the sep-
X Set the time by turning c V d the COMAND arate operating instructions.
The time is accepted.
Bluetooth® settings
General information about Blue-
Text reader settings tooth®
X Press the W button. Bluetooth®-capable devices, e.g. mobile
phones, have to comply with a certain profile
X Select System by turning cVd the in order to be connected to COMAND. Every
COMAND controller and press W to con- Bluetooth® device has its own specific Blue-
firm. tooth® name.
X Select Text Reader Speed and press W Bluetooth® technology is a standard for
to confirm. short-range wireless data transmissions up to
A list appears. The # dot indicates the cur- approximately 10 meters. Bluetooth® allows,
rent setting. for example, the exchange of vCards.
firm.
Voice Control System settings

Opening/closing the help window Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
The help window provides information in addi- tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
tion to the audible instructions during indi-
vidualization and during the subsequent voice
control.
Assigning a favorites button 45
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® Assigning a favorites button

X Press W. X To assign a favorites button: press the
The system menu appears. W button.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the X Select System by turning cVd the
System settings
COMAND controller and press W to con- COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm. firm.
X Select Activate Bluetooth and press X Select Assign as Favorite and press
W to confirm. W to confirm.
This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª. The list of predefined functions appears.
The dot # indicates the currently selected
function.
Setting the system language X Select the function by turning cVd the
This function allows you to determine the lan- firm.
guage for the menu displays and the naviga- The favorites button is assigned the
tion announcements. The selected language selected function.
affects the characters available for entry. X Example: to call up a favorite: press the
The navigation announcements are not avail- g favorites button.
able in all languages. If a language is not avail- This calls up the predefined function.
able, the navigation announcements will be in
English. You can select the following predefined func-
tions in a menu:
When you set the system language, the lan-
guage of the Voice Control System will RSplitView on/off you can switch the
on/off:
change accordingly. If the selected language screen view for the front passenger on or
is not supported by the Voice Control System, off.
English will be selected. RDisplay On/Off:
On/Off you can switch the dis-
X Press the W button. play off or on.
RFull Screen: 'Clock':
'Clock' you can call up
X Select System by turning cVd the the full screen with the clock.
COMAND controller and press W to con- R® Menu
Menu: you can call up the online and
firm.
Internet functions.
X Select Language and press W to confirm. R360° Camera:
Camera you can call up the picture
The list of languages appears. The # dot of the 360° camera.
indicates the current setting. RFull screen: 'Map':
'Map' you can call up the
X Select the language by turning cVd the full screen with the map.
COMAND controller and press W to con- RSpoken Driving Tip: Tip you can call up the
firm. current driving recommendation.
COMAND loads the selected language and RDisplay Traffic Messages
Messages: you can call
sets it. up traffic reports.
RNavigate Home:
Home you can start route guid-
ance to your home address if you have
already entered and saved the address
(Y page 69).
46 Importing/exporting data
RDetour Menu you can call up the Detour

Menu: X Press the W button.
menu and then block a section of the route The system menu appears.
and recalculate the route (Y page 92).
RCompass Screen
Screen: you can call up the com- COMAND controller and press W to con-
pass.
firm.
System settings
RDriver's Seat Massage,

Massage Front-Pas‐
senger's Seat Massage or Massage: X Select Import/Export Data and press
Both Front Seats
Seats: you can start the mas- W to confirm.
sage function, depending on which seats X Select Activate PIN Protection and
are selected (Y page 52). press W to confirm.
Activate O or deactivate ª PIN protec-
tion. When activating PIN protection, you
Importing/exporting data will be prompted to enter a PIN.
General notes
! Never remove the stick or card when writ-
ing data to the USB stick or the memory
card. You may otherwise lose data.
Using this function, you can:
Rtransfer your personal COMAND data from
one system/vehicle to another.
Rmake a backup copy of your personal data
(export data) and load it again (import
data).
X Enter a 4-digit PIN, select¬and press
Rprotect your data from unwanted export by
W to confirm.
activating a pin prompt (presetting: deacti-
You will be prompted to enter the PIN
vated ª).
again.
You can either use an SD memory card or a X Re-enter the PIN, select ¬ and press
USB storage device (e.g. a USB stick) as tem-
W to confirm.
porary storage.
The PIN prompt now protects your personal
data from unwanted export.
Activating/deactivating PIN protec- i If you deactivate your PIN protection, you
tion will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If
you have forgotten your PIN, a Mercedes-
Benz service station can deactivate your
PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you
can deactivate PIN protection by resetting
your personal COMAND data
(Y page 47).
Reset function 47
Importing/exporting data
System settings
If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt
appears when you select Export Data.Data
X Enter the PIN, select¬and press W to
confirm.
You can now proceed in the same way as if
PIN protection was deactivated.
X To select a preset: select Memory Card or
USB Storage and press W to confirm.
X Select All Data and press W to confirm.
This function exports all the data to the
selected disc.
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 191). or
or X Select the data type and press W to con-
X Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory firm.
stick) (Y page 191). Depending on the previous entry, select the
data type for the export O or not ª.
X Press W.
The system menu appears. X Select Cont. and press W to confirm.
X Select Settings by turning cVd the i Personal music files in the MUSIC REG-
COMAND controller and press W to con- ISTER cannot be saved and imported again
firm. using this function.
X Select Import/Export Data and press
W to confirm.
Reset function
X Select Import Data or Export Data and
press W to confirm. You can completely reset COMAND to the
factory settings. Amongst other things, this
will delete all personal COMAND data. This
includes the station presets, entries in the
destination memory and in the list of previous
destinations in the navigation system and
address book entries. In addition, any acti-
vated PIN protection, which you have used to
protect your data against unwanted export,
will be deactivated. Resetting is recom-
48 Reset function
mended before selling or transferring owner-

ship of your vehicle, for example.
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music
files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted.
You can also delete music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music
System settings
files" function (Y page 206).

X Select System by turning cVd the

firm.
X Select Reset and press W to confirm.
A warning message appears asking
whether you wish to reset.
If you select Yes
Yes, a prompt will appear again
asking whether you really wish to reset to
the factory settings.
If you select Yes
Yes, a message will be shown.
COMAND is reset and restarted.
If you select No
No, the process will be can-
celed.
49

Climate control status display ........... 50
Fuel consumption indicator ............... 50
ON&OFFROAD display ......................... 51
Driving conditions menu (Active
Body Control) ....................................... 51
Seat functions ..................................... 52
Vehicle functions
Rear view camera ............................... 55
Night View Assist Plus ....................... 56
360° camera ....................................... 56
50 Fuel consumption indicator
Your COMAND equipment Ã Controls the air conditioning auto-

matically
These operating instructions describe all the ñ Sets the climate control style in auto-
standard and optional equipment for your matic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE)
COMAND system, as available at the time of _ Sets the air distribution
M, P or O Sets the air distribu-
tion
Vehicle functions
all the features described. ¬ Turns on the defrost function

Ù Turns on maximum cooling
i The way that the climate control status
Climate control status display display is called up depends on your vehi-
cle's climate control system.
Example settings for the defrost function (top) and

for the climate mode in automatic mode
X To hide the display: turn or press the
The climate status display in the COMAND display COMAND controller.
(example) or
If you change the settings of the climate X Press one of the buttons on COMAND.
control system, the climate status display
appears for three seconds at the bottom of
the screen in the COMAND display. You will Fuel consumption indicator
see the current settings of the various climate
control functions. Overview
Overview of climate control systems, see the Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
separate vehicle operating instructions. engine variant installed, fuel consumption
The climate status display appears when: can be shown in the COMAND display.
X You turn the temperature control and set If your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle and the
the temperature. installed engine variant supports it, you can
or call up other displays (see the separate oper-
ating instructions).
X You turn the control to set the airflow.
or
X You press one of the following buttons:
K Increases air flow
I Decreases air flow
¿ Switches climate control on/off
á Switches the ZONE function on/off
Driving conditions menu (Active Body Control) 51
Calling up/exiting the display ON&OFFROAD display

Overview
Depending on the vehicle model series, the
settings and the status of the ON&OFFROAD
functions can be shown in the COMAND dis-
play, e.g.:
Rvehicle's angle of inclination
Vehicle functions
Ruphill or downhill gradient in percentage
Rsteering angle
Further information on the ON&OFFROAD

X To call up the full screen display: press functions can be found in the vehicle Opera-
the W button. tor's Manual.
X In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the Full Calling up displays
Screen option is selected.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
X Press W.
The system display is shown as full screen X In the system menu, slide ZV the
(without system menu). COMAND controller up until the display/
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeat-
selection window is selected.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
edly until the fuel consumption indicator
appears. the ON&OFFROAD display appears.
The COMAND display shows the fuel con- The COMAND display shows the settings
sumption for the last 15 minutes of the and status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.
journey.
X To exit the full-screen display: press W
the COMAND controller. Exiting the display
The system menu appears. X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
Every bar of the graph displays the average the desired display (clock or fuel consump-
value for one minute. tion) is shown.
The fuel consumption display may differ from
the display in the FROM START trip computer
in the Trip menu; see the vehicle Operator's Driving conditions menu (Active Body
Manual. Control)
General notes
On vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC),
you can display some driving systems and
additional information in the COMAND dis-
play.
52 Seat functions
Calling up drive status regulator (ABC) The massage function cannot be started or
stopped using the memory button.
X Press W.
X In the system menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the display/ Selecting the seat
selection window is selected.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeat-
edly until the driving conditions menu
Vehicle functions
(ABC) appears.
The corresponding displays appear in the
COMAND display.
Details on the displays:
Rfor all vehicles except AMG vehicles, see
the separate vehicle Operator's Manual
Rfor AMG vehicles, see the separate vehicle
Operator's Manual.
First select the seat which you wish to adjust.
This function is not available for all vehicles.
Exiting the display X Press the T or W button.
X Select Seat and press W to confirm.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until
the desired display (clock or fuel consump- X To switch to the lower line, for both options
tion) is shown. slide VÆ the COMAND controller.
X Select Driver's Seat or Passenger
Seat by turning cVd the COMAND con-
Seat functions troller and press W to confirm.
Overview
Using the T button next to the COMAND Adjustment functions
controller or the Seat menu item in the sys-
tem menu, you can call up different setting Adjusting the seat cushion length
functions. The following settings depend on The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series: the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
RSeat cushion length
RBackrest side bolsters
RLumbar
RBalance
RSeat cushion side bolsters
RDynamics
RMassage
i You can also store and recall the current

seat function settings using the memory
button and the corresponding memory
position switch; see the separate vehicle This function allows you to adjust the height
Operator's Manual. of the seat cushion.
Seat functions 53
X Select the seat (Y page 52). Adjusting the sides of the seat backrest
X Select Seat Surface by turning cVd the (backrest side bolsters)
COMAND Controller and press W to con- The availability of this function depends on
firm. the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
A scale appears.
X Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND con-
Vehicle functions
X To exit the menu: press the k back
button.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lum-

bar region of the seat backrest
The availability of this function depends on
the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
X Select the seat (Y page 52).
X Select Seatb. Sides by turning cVd the
firm.
A scale appears.
button.
i For vehicle model series with a dynamic
This function allows you to adjust the air multicontour seat: if the driving dynamics
cushions in the lumbar region of the backrest are activated and respond to a change of
(4-way lumbar support). direction (e.g. when cornering), the back-
X Select the seat (Y page 52). rest side bolsters cannot be temporarily
X Select Lumbar by turning cVd the adjusted.
firm. Adjusting the seat side bolsters
A crosshair appears. You can make two The availability of this function depends on
settings: the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
RVertical: to move the point of greatest
lumbar support up or down
RHorizontal: to adjust the amount of sup-
port
X Slide ZVÆ or XVY the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
button.
54 Seat functions
This function allows you to adjust the air The values stand for:
cushions in the seat side bolsters. R0 - backrest and seat cushion are heated
X Select the seat (Y page 52). equally to the maximum level
X Select Seat Sides by turning cVd the R1 to 3 - the heat output to the seat cush-
COMAND controller and press W to con- ion is reduced in one-third increments
firm. R-1 to -3 - the heat output to the backrest
A scale appears. is reduced in one-third increments
Vehicle functions
X Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND con- X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con-
troller and press W to confirm. troller and press W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the k back X To exit the menu: press the k back
button. button.
Balance Massage function

The availability of this function depends on The availability of this function depends on
the vehicle model series. the type of seat and the vehicle model series.
The Balance function controls the distribution Example display (M-Class or GL-Class)
of heat on the seat backrest and cushion. X Select the seat (Y page 52).
The Balance function influences the currently X Select Massage by turning cVd the
set heating level of the seat heating; see the COMAND controller and press W to con-
separate vehicle Operator's Manual. firm.
X Select the seat (Y page 52). A list appears.
X Select Balance by turning cVd the You can select different types of massage
COMAND controller and press W to con- function:
firm. R0: Off
A scale appears and shows the current set- R1: Slow and Gentle
ting. Positive values indicate the heat out-
R2: Slow and Vigorous
put for the seat backrest, negative values
indicate the heat output for the seat cush- R3: Fast and Gentle
ion. The intensity is indicated by an orange R4: Fast and Vigorous
bar in the stylized seat above the scale.
Rear view camera 55
X Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the COMAND con- Resetting all adjustments
The massage function runs for approx-
imately 15 to 25 minutes, depending on the
setting.
button.
Vehicle functions
Adjusting the driving dynamics
This function is available on vehicle model
series with a dynamic multicontour seat.
X Select the seat (Y page 52).
X Select Reset All by turning cVd the
firm.
A prompt appears.
If you select No
celed.
After you select Yes
Yes, all seat adjustments
are reset to the default values (factory set-
X Select the seat (Y page 52). ting).
X Select Dynamic Seat by turning cVd the
firm. Rear view camera
A scale appears.
You can select: The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
R 0:Off immediate surroundings. You are always
R 1:level 1 (medium setting) responsible for safe maneuvering and park-
R2: level 2 (high setting) ing. When maneuvering or parking, make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects
in the area in which you are maneuvering.
The image from the rear view camera is
shown in the COMAND display when reverse
button. gear is engaged if:
Ryour vehicle is equipped with a rear view
camera.
RCOMAND is switched on
Rthe Activation by R gear function is
activated.
If the function is activated, the COMAND dis-
play will automatically switch back to the pre-
56 360° camera
viously selected display as soon as you shift played as soon as pedestrians or animals
out of reverse gear. are detected.
i For further information on the rear view X To switch off the display: select Back and
camera, see separate vehicle Operator's press W to confirm or press the k but-
Manual. ton.
The system menu appears.
360° camera
Vehicle functions

COMAND controller and press W to con- Important notes
firm. The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
X Select Rear View Camera and press W to replacement for your attention to your imme-
confirm. diate surroundings. You are always responsi-
ble for safe maneuvering and parking. When
X Select Activation by R gear and press maneuvering or parking, make sure that there
W to confirm. are no persons, animals or objects in the area
The function is switched on O or off ª, in which you are maneuvering.
depending on the previous status.
Overview
Night View Assist Plus The 360° camera surveys the vehicle sur-
roundings and assists you, for example when
On vehicles with Night View Assist Plus you parking or at exits with reduced visibility.
can have the image from Night View Assist
Plus shown on the COMAND display. The 360° camera images can be shown in full
screen mode or in seven different split-screen
X Switch on COMAND (Y page 29).
views on the COMAND display. A split-screen
X Activate Night View Assist Plus, see the view also includes a top view of the vehicle.
separate operating instructions. This view is calculated from the data supplied
The image from Night View Assist Plus by the installed cameras (virtual camera).
appears in the COMAND display.
X To adjust the brightness: select Bright‐
ness by turning cVd the COMAND con- Displaying the 360° camera image
troller and press W to confirm. The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam-
press W to confirm. era
RCOMAND is switched on (Y page 29)
X Switching automatic activation on/off:
select Night View Assist Auto. Acti‐ Rthe 360° Camera function is activated
vation and press W to confirm.
Switch the option on O or off ª.
Option switched on: while using other func-
tions e.g. the navigation system, Night View
Assist Plus is active in the background. In
the dark, in unlit surroundings and at
speeds in excess of 37 mph (60 km/h), the
Night View image is automatically dis-
360° camera 57
You can activate the 360° display by: X Select 360° Camera and press W to con-
Rengaging reverse gear (only possible if the firm.
Activation by R gear option is acti- The 360° camera image appears in split-
vated) screen mode.
Rselecting the 360° Camera menu item in or
the System menu X Engage reverse gear (only possible if the
Rpressing and holding the W function Activation by R gear option is acti-
vated)
Vehicle functions
button
The 360° camera split-screen image with
As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of
backing up image appears.
19 mph (30 km/h) with the function acti-
vated, the function switches off. The For a detailed description of the 360° cam-
COMAND display switches back to the previ- era, see the separate vehicle Operator's Man-
ously selected view. ual.
You can also switch the display by selecting
the & symbol in the display and pressing
W the COMAND controller.
X To switch reverse gear activation on/
off: press the W function button.
The system menu appears.
firm.
X Select 360° Camera and press W to con-
firm.
X Select Activation by R gear and press
W to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
i You need only switch this function on if
you want the 360° camera image to be dis-
played when you engage reverse gear. The
other activation options are always availa-
ble as well.
X To display the 360° camera image:
press the W function button for at least
2 seconds.
The full-screen display appears.
or
firm.
58
59

Introduction ......................................... 60
Basic settings ...................................... 62
Destination input ................................ 63
Entering a POI ...................................... 76
Personal POIs ...................................... 82
Search & Send ..................................... 86
Route guidance ................................... 87
Traffic reports ..................................... 99
Navigation
Destination memory ......................... 103
Previous destinations ....................... 107
Map operation and map settings .... 108
Additional settings ........................... 114
Problems with the navigation sys-
tem ..................................................... 120
60 Introduction
Your COMAND equipment have been diverted or the direction of a one-

way street may have changed.
These operating instructions describe all the For this reason, you must always observe
standard and optional equipment for your road and traffic rules and regulations during
COMAND system, as available at the time of your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
going to print. Country-specific differences ulations always have priority over the sys-
are possible. Please note that your tem's driving recommendations.
COMAND system may not be equipped with Navigation announcements are intended to
all the features described. direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Navigation
Please always use this feature instead of con-

Introduction sulting the map display for directions. Look-
Important safety notes ing at the icons or map display can distract
you from traffic conditions and driving, and
G WARNING increase the risk of an accident.
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from General notes
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Operational readiness of the navigation
system
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this The navigation system must determine the
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention position of the vehicle before first use or
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- whenever operational status is restored.
ment when the vehicle is stationary. Therefore, you may have to drive for a while
before precise route guidance is possible.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving GPS reception
when operating COMAND.
Among other things, correct functioning of
COMAND calculates the route to the destina-
the navigation system depends on GPS recep-
tion without taking account of the following,
tion. In certain situations, GPS reception may
for example:
be impaired, there may be interference or
Rtraffic lights there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tun-
Rstop and yield signs nels or parking garages.
Rmerging lanes
i Using roof carriers may impair the correct
Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no functioning of a roof antenna (phone, sat-
stopping zone ellite radio, GPS).
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
Rnarrow bridges Entry restriction
COMAND can give incorrect navigation com- On vehicles for certain countries, there is a
mands if the actual street/traffic situation restriction on entering data.
does not correspond with the digital map's The restriction is active from a vehicle speed
data. Digital maps do not cover all areas nor of above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). As
all routes in an area. For example, a route may soon as the speed falls below approximately
Introduction 61
2 mph (3 km/h), the restriction becomes

inactive.
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
fact that certain menu items are grayed out
and cannot be selected.
The following entries are not possible, for
example:
Rentering the destination city and street
Rentering a destination via the map
Navigation
Rentering POIs in the vicinity of a city or via Map without the menu (route guidance inactive)
a name search : Current vehicle position
Rediting entries ; Map orientation selected
Rusing the number keypad for direct entry = Map scale selected
Other entries are possible, such as entering i Route guidance active means that you
points of interest in the vicinity of the desti- have entered a destination and that
nation or current position. COMAND has calculated the route. The dis-
play shows the route, changes of direction
and lane recommendations. Navigation
Switching to navigation mode announcements guide you to your destina-
tion.
Route guidance inactive means that no
destination has been entered yet and no
route has been calculated yet.
Showing/hiding the menu

You can show or hide the menu on the map.
X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full Screen
Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive menu item is shown, press W to confirm.
: Status bar or
; Main function bar X Press the k back button.
= Current vehicle position The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-
? Navigation menu bar play.
X Press the Ø function button. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
The map is displayed with the menu either controller when the map is shown in full-
shown or hidden. screen display.
or
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
The map is displayed with the menu shown.
Z
62 Basic settings
Basic settings You can select the following route types:

RFast Route COMAND calculates a route
Route:
Setting route type and route options
with the shortest (minimized) journey time.
RDynamic Traffic Route:Route is the same
route type as Fast Route.
Route In addition,
COMAND takes into account any relevant
traffic reports received during route guid-
ance. The navigation system can help you
avoid a traffic jam, for example, by recal-
culating the route.
Navigation
RDynamic TRF. Route Only After

Request: is the same route type as
Request
Dynamic Traffic Route.Route After recalcu-
Route settings menu (start of menu) lating the route, COMAND asks you
: To select the route type whether you want to adopt the new route
or whether you want to continue along the
; To set the number of persons in the vehi-
original route.
cle for the use of carpool lanes
REco Route:
Route the Eco Route (economical
= To set route options
route) is a variant of the Fast Route type.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by COMAND will attempt to minimize the jour-
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND ney distance at the expense of a slightly
controller and press W to confirm. increased journey time.
X Select Route Settings and press W to RShort Route
Route: COMAND calculates a route
confirm. with the shortest possible (minimized)
The route settings menu appears. route distance.
X Select a route type and press W to confirm. i The route calculated may, for example,
A filled circle indicates the current setting. include ferry connections, even if the
X Select the route option(s) and press W to Avoid Ferries route option is switched
confirm. on.
The route options are switched on O or off In some cases, COMAND may not be able
ª, depending on the previous status. to take all the selected route options into
account, e.g. when calculating particularly
i If you change the route type and/or the long routes.
route options while route guidance is X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
active, COMAND will calculate a new route.
controller.
If you change the route type and/or the
route options while route guidance is inac-
tive, COMAND uses the new setting for the
Setting the number of persons in the
next route guidance.
vehicle for the use of carpool lanes
Route guidance active: a destination has
been entered and the route has been cal- For route calculation, you can take HOV or
culated. carpool lanes into account.
Route guidance inactive: no destination If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please
has been entered yet and no route has been observe the applicable laws as well as the
calculated yet. local and time limitation conditions.
Destination input 63
Carpool lanes may only be used under certain

conditions. They can normally be used when
there are two people in the vehicle. However,
there are also carpool lanes which can only
be used when there are three or more people
in the vehicle. In California, lone drivers can
use a carpool lane if their vehicle's emission
level or fuel consumption is below a fixed
threshold.
Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific
times (e.g. during the peak period).
Navigation
Carpool lanes are identified by HOV symbols
X Select 1, 2 or More than 2 by turning
on special road signs and by markings on the cVd and press W to confirm.
road. The road signs may also include the A # dot indicates the current setting.
designation CARPOOL
CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged
as a separate lane next to the others or are
built as a physically separate lane. Destination input
Depending on the setting under Number of Important safety notes
Occupants in Vehicle
Vehicle, COMAND uses car-
pool lanes when calculating the route. G WARNING
COMAND then guides you in and out of car- If you operate information systems and com-
pool lanes using visual and acoustic driving munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
directions. cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving
when operating COMAND.
X In the route settings menu, select Number
of Occupants in Vehicle by turning
cVd the COMAND controller. Entering a destination by address
Introduction
When entering an address as the destination,
you have the following options:
Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code
and street
Rentering the state/province, city and
center
Z
64 Destination input
Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code,

street and house number
Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code,
street and intersection
Rentering the state/province, street, city
and house number
Rentering the state/province, street and
house number
Rentering the state/province, street and
intersection
Navigation
Address entry menu

i You can only enter those cities, streets,
ZIP codes etc. that are stored on the digital X Select Address Entry and press W to
map. This means that for some countries, confirm.
you cannot enter ZIP codes, for example. The address entry menu appears. If you
have previously entered a destination, this
The step-by-step instructions for entering an
will be shown in the display.
address use the following example data:
New York (state) Depending on the amount of the address
entered and the data in the digital map, some
New York (city)
menu items may not be available at all or may
40 Broadway not yet be available.
Of course, you can freely enter information Example: after you enter the state/province,
such as state/province, city, street and the Map
Map, No.
No., Center
Center, Intersection
Intersection, Save
house number, for example to enter your and Start menu items are not available. The
home address. ZIP menu item is not available unless the dig-
ital map contains ZIP codes.
Address entry menu
Calling up the address entry menu Entering the state/province, city, street
and number
X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button. Selecting a state/province
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND X Call up the address entry menu
controller. (Y page 64).
X Select State/Prov in the address entry
X Select Destination by turning cVd the
menu by turning cVd the COMAND con-
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
A menu with the available lists appears:
RLast States/Provinces
RStates (U.S.A.)
RProvinces (Canada)
X To select a list: turn cVd the COMAND

The list of selected states/provinces
appears.
X To select a state/province: turn cVd the
firm.
The address entry menu appears again. The
state/province selected has now been
entered.
Navigation
Entering a city List of cities as selection list
X Call up the address entry menu Option 2: city list as selection list
(Y page 64). X Select an entry by turning cVd the
X Select City in the address entry menu by COMAND controller.
turning cVd the COMAND controller and X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
press W to confirm. firm your selection.
You will see the city list either with the The address entry menu appears again. The
character bar (option 1) or as a selection city has now been entered.
list (option 2).
Entering a street name
X Call up the address entry menu
(Y page 64).
X Select Street in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
firm.
You will see the street list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
City list with character bar

Option 1: city list with the character bar
X Enter NEW YORK
YORK. Character entry, using city
input as an example (Y page 36).
Street list with character bar

Option 1: street list with character bar
X Enter BROADWAY
BROADWAY. Character entry, using city
Z

firm.
You will see the house number list either
with the character bar (option 1) or as a
selection list (option 2).
Navigation
Street list as selection list

Option 2: street list as selection list
X Select a street by turning cVd the
firm.
If an entry has the G symbol, it is ambig- House number list with character bar
uous. You can select the entry you want Option 1: house number list with character
from an additional selection list. bar
X Enter 4 and 0. Character entry, using city
X Select an entry by turning cVd the

COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, press W to con- House number list as selection list
firm your selection. Option 2: house number list as selection list
The address entry menu appears again. The X Select an entry by turning cVd the
street has now been entered. COMAND controller.
Entering a house number X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
Entering a house number will delete a previ- firm your selection.
ously entered intersection. The address entry menu appears again. The
X Call up the address entry menu house number has now been entered.
(Y page 64).
X Select No. in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
Entering the ZIP code, center and inter- X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
section firm your selection.
If COMAND is able to assign the ZIP code
Entering a ZIP code
unambiguously to a specific address, the
X Call up the address entry menu address entry menu appears again. The ZIP
(Y page 64). code appears in place of the city's name.
X Select ZIP in the address entry menu by If COMAND cannot assign the ZIP code
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the unambiguously to a specific address, the
COMAND controller and press W to con- address entry menu also appears again.
firm. The ZIP code is automatically entered. You
You will see the ZIP code list either with the can now enter the street for a more precise
Navigation
character bar (option 1) or as a selection location. Only streets in the area covered
list (option 2). by the entered ZIP code are available.
X Start route calculation (Y page 69).
Entering a center
Entering a center will, for example, delete a
previously entered street.
(Y page 64).
X Select Center in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
firm.
List of ZIP codes with character bar You will see the center list either with the
Option 1: ZIP code list with character bar character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
X Enter a ZIP code. Character entry, using city
City center list with character bar
ZIP code list as selection list Option 1: center list with character bar
Option 2: ZIP code list as selection list X Enter a center. Character entry, using city
X Select the desired zip code by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
Z
68
Navigation Destination input
Center list as selection list Intersection list with character bar

Option 2: center list as selection list : List entry most closely resembling the
characters entered so far
X Select a center by turning cVd the
; List
COMAND controller.
= Character bar
X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
firm your selection. Option 1: intersection list with character bar
The address entry menu appears again. The X Enter an intersection. Character entry,
center selected has been entered. using city input as an example
X Start route calculation (Y page 69). (Y page 36).
Entering an intersection
(Y page 64).
X Select Intersection in the address entry
menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
firm.
You will see the intersection list either with
the character bar (option 1) or as a selec-
tion list (option 2).
Intersection list as selection list
Option 2: intersection list as selection list
X Select an intersection by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
firm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again. The
intersection selected has been entered.
X Start route calculation (Y page 69).
Starting route calculation Option 2 – route guidance is already

active: if route guidance is already active, a
prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to terminate the currently active route guid-
ance.
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND will stop route
guidance and start route calculation for the
new destination.
If you select No
No, COMAND will continue
Navigation
with the active route guidance.
i Route calculation takes a certain amount
Address entry menu with destination address
of time. The time depends on the distance
: Destination address
from the destination, for example.
; To start route calculation COMAND calculates the route using the
You can have COMAND calculate a route to digital map data.
the destination address, or you can save the The calculated route can differ from the
destination address (for example, as your ideal route, for example because of incom-
home address (My address)) (Y page 69). plete map data. Please also refer to the
X Call up the address entry menu notes about the digital map (Y page 118).
(Y page 64).
X In the address entry menu, confirm Start Entering and saving your home address
by pressing W. You can either enter your home address for
If no other route has been calculated, route the first time (option 1) or edit a previously
calculation starts immediately (option 1). If stored home address (option 2).
another route has already been calculated X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a city,
(route guidance is active), a prompt street and house number (Y page 64).
appears (option 2).
i The Continue menu item is displayed X Once you have entered the address, select
instead of Start if Calculate Alterna‐ Save in the address entry menu by turning
tive Routes is activated in the navigation cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND con-
menu (option 2) (Y page 93). troller and press W to confirm.
Option 1 – no route guidance active: route X Select Save as "My Address" and press
calculation starts. While route calculation is W to confirm.
in progress, an arrow will indicate the direc- COMAND stores your home address under
tion to your destination. Below this, you will the My Address entry in the destination
see a message, e.g. Calculating Fast memory.
Route.
Route X Option 2: proceed as described under
Once the route has been calculated, route "Option 1".
guidance begins. A prompt appears asking whether the cur-
If the vehicle is not on a digitized road, the rent home address should be overwritten.
following is displayed:
X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
Rthe linear distance to the destination After selecting Yes
Yes, the Saving Proce‐
Rthe direction to the destination dure/Successful message appears.
Rthe Off Mapped Road message
Z
Selecting a destination from the des- B Characters not currently available

tination memory (e.g. My address) C Character bar
Introduction D Currently selected character
E Cancels an entry
The destination memory always contains an
entry named "My Address". You may wish to F Characters currently available
assign your home address to this entry, for X Enter a destination, e.g. "My Address".
example (Y page 69), and select it for route Character entry, using city input as an
guidance. This entry is always located at the example (Y page 36).
top of the list in the destination memory.
Navigation
X To switch to navigation mode: press the Option 2: destination memory list as

Ø button. selection list
controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
tem menu bar by turning cVd the
confirm.
X Select From Memory and press W to con-
firm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2). Destination memory list
X Select My Address by turning cVd the
Option 1: destination memory list with COMAND controller.
character bar X Irrespective of the option, press W to con-
firm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again.
"My Address" has been entered.
X To start route calculation: select Start
Entering a destination from the list of

last destinations
: Character entered by the user Ø button.
; Characters automatically added by the
system
controller.
= List entry most closely resembling the
characters entered so far X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
? Switches to the selection list tem menu bar by turning cVd the
A Deletes an entry

confirm.
Navigation
: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
= Details of the crosshair position
X Select From Last Destinations and
press W to confirm. ? Map scale selected
X Select the desired destination by turning X Select Using Map and press W to confirm.
cVd the COMAND controller and press You will see the map with a crosshair.
W to confirm. Display = depends on the settings selected
The address entry menu appears again. The in "Map information in the display"
destination address selected has been (Y page 111). You can see the current street
entered. name if the digital map contains the neces-
X To start route calculation: select Start sary data, You can see the coordinates of the
and press W to confirm. crosshair if the geo-coordinate display is
switched on and the GPS signal is strong
Once the route has been calculated, route enough.
guidance begins (Y page 69).
i “Last destinations” memory Moving the map and selecting the des-
(Y page 107). tination
X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb the COMAND controller.
Entering a destination using the map
X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
Calling up the map cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
X To switch to navigation mode: press the appears.
Ø button. X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;
turning counter-clockwise zooms in.
controller.
confirm.
Z
72
Navigation Destination input
X To select a destination: press W the X Select Using Geo-Coordinates and

COMAND controller once or several times. press W to confirm.
If COMAND is unable to assign a unique An entry menu appears.
address, you will see either the address You can now enter the latitude and longitude
entry menu with the destination address or coordinates with the COMAND controller or
a selection list. the number keypad (Y page 36).
X Select a destination by turning cVd the X To change a value: turn cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- COMAND controller.
firm. X To move the mark within the line: slide
If the destination is within the limits of the XVY the COMAND controller.
digital map, COMAND attempts to assign
X To move the mark between the lines:
the destination to the map.
slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
If the destination can be assigned, you will
X To confirm the value: press W the
see the address entry menu with the
address of the destination. If not, you will COMAND controller.
see the Destination From Map entry. i If the selected position is outside the dig-
X To start route calculation: select Start ital map, COMAND uses the nearest digi-
and press W to confirm. tized road for route calculation. You will see
the The coordinates are outside the
map area message. If the selected position
Entering a destination using geo-coor- is located over a body of water, you will see
dinates the message: The destination is in
a body of water. Please select
X To switch to navigation mode: press the another destination.
Ø button.
controller. Entering a destination using
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Ø button.
confirm. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
COMAND controller and pressing W to Entering way points

confirm.
Introduction
X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps and press
W to confirm. You can map the route yourself by entering
If an Internet connection is established, you up to four way points. The sequence of the
will see the message Do you want to way points can be changed at any time.
accept the navigation data sent COMAND provides a selection of predefined
via Mercedes-Benz Apps? destinations in eight categories for this pur-
pose, e.g. GAS STATION or COFFEE SHOP
SHOP. You
can also use the destination entry options to
Navigation
Street View enter way points.
Creating way points

Ø button.
Way point menu (with destination, without way
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND point)
controller. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
X Select Destination in the lower menu bar Ø button.
by turning cVd the COMAND controller X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
and press W to confirm. controller.
X Select Address Entry and press W to
confirm. tem menu bar by turning cVd the
X Select icon : in the address entry menu
and press W to confirm. confirm.
If an Internet connection is established, you X Select Intermediate Destinations and
will see the Street View basic display. press W to confirm.
X To explore the view of the street: turn
The destination is entered into the way
cVd or slide XVY, points menu. The way points are not yet
ZVÆ the COMAND controller. entered.
X To return to navigation: press the k X Confirm Add: by pressing W the COMAND
button. controller.
Z
Selection Action
From Personal X Enter a destina-
POIs tion from the per-
sonal POIs
(Y page 85).
Using Map X Enter a destina-

tion using the map
(Y page 71).
Navigation
Using Geo-Coor‐ X Enter a destina-

X Select the category or Other by turning
dinates tion using the geo-
coordinates
W to confirm.
(Y page 72).
After selecting a category, the POIs which
are available along the route and in the
vicinity are displayed.
COMAND first searches for destinations
along the route. Searching for destinations
then continues within a radius of approx-
imately 60 miles (100 km) of the vehicle
position.
X After selecting Other
Other, select one of the
destination entry options from the list.
Selection Action
Address Entry X Enter a destina- X Select POI and press W to confirm.
tion by address After selecting a POI or entering a destina-
(Y page 63). tion, the address of the way point is dis-
played.
From Memory X Select a destina-
tion from the des- After entering a destination using the map,
tination memory the address entry menu is displayed. OK is
(Y page 70). highlighted.
From Last Desti‐ X Select a destina-

nations tion from the list
of last destina-
tions (Y page 70).
From POIs X Select a point of

interest
(Y page 76).
X To accept the way point: confirm OK by To change the sequence, at least one way
pressing W. point and the destination must be entered.
Once you have accepted the way point, it
is entered in the way point menu.
X To display the details: select Details by
press W to confirm.
X To make a call: select Call with the
firm. COMAND switches to telephone
Navigation
mode (Y page 132).
i This menu item is available if the way
point has a telephone number and if a X Select a way point in the way point menu
mobile phone is connected to COMAND by turning cVd the COMAND controller
(Y page 126). and press W to confirm.
X To call up the map: select Map with the A menu appears.
firm.
X You can move the map and select the des-
tination.
X To store the way point in the destina-
tion memory: select Presets with the
firm (Y page 105).
X To change a way point: select Edit from

the menu and press W to confirm.
X Change the address, e.g. the city and
street, and confirm with OK
OK.
The way point menu appears and displays
the modified way point.
Way point menu with two way point entries
Editing way points

You can:
Rchange way points
Rchange the sequence in the way point
menu
Rdelete way points
Z
76 Entering a POI
You can change the sequence of the way If you select No

No, the search is canceled.
points and the destination. X Select a gas station and press W to con-
X To change the sequence: from the menu, firm.
select Move by turning cVd the COMAND The address of the gas station is displayed.
controller and press W to confirm. X Confirm Start by pressing W.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and The selected gas station is entered into
move the way point or destination to the position 1 of the way points menu. Route
desired position, then press W to confirm. guidance begins.
If the way points menu already contains
X To delete way points: from the menu,
four way points, a prompt will be displayed,
select Delete and press W to confirm.
Navigation
asking you whether you wish to enter the

gas station into position 1. If you select
Accepting way points for the route Yes, the gas station is transferred into the
Yes
XSelect Start in the way point menu by list and way point 4 is deleted.
press W to confirm.
The route is calculated with the entered Entering a POI
way points. Calling up the points of interest menu
i Continue is displayed instead of Start
when Calculate Alternative Routes
is activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 93).
i If a way point has been passed during
route guidance, the way point will be dis-
played in the way point menu with a green
arrow. Once the route has been recalcu-
lated, the way point is deleted from the way
point menu.
Searching for a gas station when the Example: POI menu

fuel level is low POIs are predefined destinations within cat-
egories, e.g. a gas station in the AUTOMO‐
If the reserve fuel warning is displayed, you
TIVE category.
will see the message: Reserve Fuel
Level. Do you want to start the
search//for surrounding gas sta‐ Ø button.
tions?.
tions? X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
X Select Yes or No No. controller.
If you select Yes
Yes, the gas station search X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
starts. When the search is complete, a list
of the gas stations available along the route
or in the vicinity is displayed.
firm.
X Select From POIs and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Entering a POI 77
X Choose one of the options and press W to

confirm.
Further steps are arranged in a table
according to the option selected
(Y page 78).
Navigation
Z
78 Entering a POI
Defining the position for the point of interest search
Selection Characteristic Instructions

Near Destina‐ Entry is only possible X Select Near Destination from the POI
tion when route guidance is menu and press W to confirm.
active. X Select a POI category (Y page 79).
Current Posi‐ The system looks for a X Select Current Position in the POI
tion point of interest in the menu and press W to confirm.
vicinity of the current X Select a POI category (Y page 79).
Navigation
vehicle position.
Other City After entering a city, the Option 1
system looks for the POI X Select Other City in the POI menu and
within the city. press W to confirm.
X If desired, select the state/province
(Y page 64).
X Enter the city. Proceed as described in
the "Entering a city" section
(Y page 64).
X Select a POI category (Y page 79).
Option 2:
X Enter a city in the address entry menu
(Y page 64).
X Select POI and press W to confirm.
X Select a point of interest category.
Search By Name You can call up all the X Select Search By Name in the POI menu
points of interest in the and press W to confirm.
digital map or focus your X Select All POIs or one of the three pre-
search on the three previously selected positions.
viously selected posi- The point of interest list with character
tions. bar appears.
X Proceed as described in the "POI list with
character bar" section (Y page 80).
Search By Phone This function gives you X Select Search By Phone Number and
Number access to all points of press W to confirm.
interest that have a You will see a list of phone numbers.
phone number. X Proceed as described in the "POI list with
character bar" section (Y page 80).
Entering a POI 79
Searching by point of interest cate-

gory
Navigation
Point of interest search near the current position
(example)
The POI search is canceled when 50 POIs
POI category list
have been found.
X Call up the POI menu (Y page 76). COMAND searches within a radius of approx-
After entering a city, the POI category list imately 60 miles (100 km).
appears after choosing the menu item
Once the search is completed, the POI list is
Near Destination,
Destination Current Position
displayed.
or Other City.
City
X Select a POI category by turning cVd the
If COMAND does not find any POIs within this
radius, it extends its search range to approx-
imately 125 miles (200 km).
firm. The G arrow behind an entry shows
If COMAND finds one POI within this radius,
that other categories are available.
it finishes the search.
POI list
Introduction
GAS STATION category selected

X Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The search for points of interest begins in
the vicinity of the selected position.
POI list (example)

The POI list displays the search results for the
category in the vicinity of the selected posi-
tion.
Z
80 Entering a POI
The search results display the following infor- Further information on searching via POI cat-
mation: egories (Y page 79).
Ran arrow that shows the linear direction to X Select the POI in the POI list by turning
the point of interest cVd the COMAND controller and press
Rthe linear distance to the point of interest W to confirm.
Rthe name of the point of interest The complete address of the point of inter-
est selected is shown.
i The arrow and linear distance to the des-
tination are not visible if you have entered X To start route calculation: select
a POI after entering another city. Start; and press W to confirm.
Start
X To store an address in the destination
Navigation
The arrow is also not shown when search-

ing for a POI in the vicinity of the destina- memory: select Save = and press W to
tion. confirm. You can now select storing
Depending on the POI selected, COMAND options (Y page 105).
uses different reference points in deter- X To show the detailed view: select
mining the linear distance to the destina- Details ? and press W to confirm.
tion: X To make a call: select Call
CallA and press
Rvicinity of current position: the linear dis- W to confirm. COMAND switches to tele-
tance is the distance of the point of inter- phone mode (Y page 132).
est from the current vehicle position. i This menu item is available if the POI has
Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance a telephone number and a mobile phone is
is the distance from the destination connected to COMAND (Y page 126).
entered to the point of interest. X To call up the map: select Map
MapC and
press W to confirm.
Selecting a point of interest
X You can move the map and select the des-
tination (Y page 71).
POI list with character bar
: Point of interest with address

; To start route calculation
= To store an address in the destination
memory Search by name in the vicinity of the destination
? To display details (example)
A To make a call (when available) If you have selected Search By Name in the
B To cancel selection POI menu and then defined the position for
C To display a point of interest's position on the search (Y page 78), the POI list with char-
the map acter bar appears.
Entering a POI 81
Depending on your selection, you can select

all available points of interest on the digital
map or the points of interest in the vicinity of
the selected position.
X Proceed as described in "Searching for a
phone book entry" (Y page 138).
If COMAND can assign the characters
entered to one entry unambiguously, the
address entry appears automatically.
Navigation
and press W to confirm. ZAGAT example description
X To show the information: select
Details and press W to confirm.
ZAGAT® survey service
Selecting a POI using the map
The Z icon before a search result shows that

a ZAGAT® rating is available for this entry.
Point of interest on the map
You can select points of interest that are
available in the selected (visible) section of
the map. The POI is highlighted on the map,
you will see further information on the upper
edge of the display.
Ø button.
controller.
: ZAGAT ratings
X Select Guide in the navigation system
; To display details menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select an entry with the "Z" icon by turning controller and press W to confirm.
cVd the COMAND controller and press If points of interest are available:
W to confirm. Depending on the map scale selected,
The ZAGAT evaluations appear. point of interest icons appear on the map.
The scale at which the icons are displayed
Z
82 Personal POIs
on the map varies according to the icon. Settings

You can select the icons that you want
COMAND to display. Calling up the "Personal POIs" menu
If no points of interest are available, you will
see a message to this effect.
i You also see this message if you have
selected the No Symbols menu item under
"Map display" (Y page 110).
X To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
Navigation
X To select a POI: select Next or Previous

X To show details for the selection: select
Ø button.
X To change to the map: slide ZV the X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
COMAND controller. controller.
You can move the map and select the map
section. X Select Navi in the main function bar by
X To start route calculation: select Start controller and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the point X Select Personal POIs and press W to
of interest should be used as the destina- confirm.
tion.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. Displaying personal POIs on the map
i Cont. is displayed instead of Start when
Calculate Alternative Routes is acti-
vated in the navigation menu
(Y page 93).
Personal POIs
General notes
i The use of personal POIs for displaying
traffic surveillance equipment is not per-
mitted in every country. Please observe the The personal POIs are shown on the map with
country-specific regulations and adapt an icon according to their category.
your speed accordingly when driving. X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 82).
X Select Display Personal POIs On Map
in the menu and press W to confirm.
You can select different categories.
Personal POIs 83
Selection Explanation
X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 82).
ª Not Clas‐ Standard entry for per- X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Vis‐
sified sonal POIs ual Warning For Personal POIs and
press W to confirm.
ª COMAND Personal POIs (destina-
tions, routes) that you The menu displays the available categories.
have imported via the X Select a category and press W to confirm.
online function This will switch the visual warning for all
(Y page 163). personal POIs of this category on O or off
ª, depending on the previous setting.
Navigation
If you have created your own categories (e.g.
"Fishing", "Hotels"), they are also displayed Acoustic notification for personal POIs
(Y page 83).
X Select a category and press W to confirm.
A gong sounds when the vehicle is approach-
ing a personal POI. The function for the cor-
The icon display is switched on O or off
responding category must be activated for
ª, depending on the previous status. this.
i The icons will be displayed in the following X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
map scales: (Y page 82).
R1/16 mile (50 m) X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Acous‐
R1/8 mile (100 m) tic Notification for Personal POIs
R1/4 mile (200 m) and press W to confirm.
R1/2 mile (500 m) The menu displays the available categories.
Visual warning for personal POIs This will switch the acoustic notification for
all personal POIs of this category on O or
off ª, depending on the previous setting.
Managing categories for personal

points of interest
If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI,

this is highlighted on the map. The display for
the corresponding category must be acti-
vated for this.
Z
84 Personal POIs
X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
(Y page 82). If you select Yes
Yes, the category will be
X In the "Personal POIs" menu, select Man‐ deleted.
age Categories For Personal POIs If you select No
and press W to confirm. celed.
Managing personal POIs

X Call up the "Personal POIs" menu
(Y page 82).
X Select Manage Personal POIs in the
Navigation
menu and press W to confirm.

X Select Not Classified,
Classified COMAND Online
or your own category and press W to con-
firm.
X Select a personal POI and press W to con-
X To create a new category: select New and firm.
press W to confirm. The personal point of interest is displayed.
X Enter the name of the category. Character For further information on managing personal
entry (Y page 34). POI categories (Y page 85):
X Select the ¬ icon and press W to con- RRenaming
firm. RChanging the category
A list with icons appears. You can assign an RDeleting
icon to the category.
X Select a symbol by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- Saving personal POIs
firm. There are three ways to save personal points
You have created a new category with a of interest. You must insert an SD memory
name and icon. This category appears card to do so. The No Memory Card message
when selecting the display on the map or otherwise appears.
when selecting the destination.
Personal POIs and routes are saved on the
X To rename a category, to change an memory card in the same data format in
icon: select Rename or Change Icon and which the geographical data is stored. This
press W to confirm. format is based on the open GPX (GPS
X Proceed as described under "To create a Exchange) format.
new category". Option 1
XTo delete a category: select Delete and X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 191).
press W to confirm. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
A prompt appears asking whether the cat- Ø button.
egory should be deleted.
i If you delete a category, all points of inter-
est of this category are also deleted.
Personal POIs 85
X Hide the menu to show the map in full Importing personal POIs via the online
screen mode (Y page 61). function
X Press W the COMAND controller for longer
You can import personal POIs (destinations,
than two seconds. routes) via the online function (Y page 163).
The current position of the vehicle is saved When importing, you can choose whether to
as a personal POI on the SD memory card write files to the SD memory card or to file
in the Not Classified category. them in the address book. The imported per-
i The crosshair position is saved in the sonal POIs have their own icon and are filed
scrolling map function (Y page 108). in the COMAND Online category.
Option 2:
Navigation
X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 191).
Selecting as the destination
Ø button.
controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select Save Position As Personal
POI or Save Crosshair Pos. as Per‐
sonal POI ("Move map" function active)
The list of personal categories appears.
Ø button.
X Name for the personal point of interest.
Character entry (Y page 34). X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Option 3
Ø button.
firm.
(Y page 64). X Select From Personal POIs and press
W to confirm.
X Select Save from the address entry menu
The categories of personal POIs appear.
X Select Save As Personal POI and press
W to confirm.
X Select a category.
X Enter the name.
The current address is saved as a personal
point of interest on the SD memory card.
Z
86 Search & Send
Selection Explanation
X To change to the map: select Map and
press W to confirm.
Not Classi‐ Standard entry for per- The position of the personal point of inter-
fied sonal points of interest. est is shown in the map.
COMAND Personal POIs which you i A symbol is displayed according to the
Online have imported via the "Displaying personal POIs on the map" set-
online function ting (Y page 82).
(Y page 163). X To start route calculation: select Start
Coffee Shops Symbol and category that
If route guidance has been activated, a
you have created yourself
Navigation
prompt will appear asking whether you

(Y page 83).
wish to accept the personal point of inter-
est as the destination.
If route guidance has not been activated,
route calculation for the personal point of
interest will start immediately.
If you select Yes
Yes, the personal POI is
accepted as the destination.
If you select No
celed.
X To make a call: select Call and press W
to confirm. COMAND switches to tele-
In the example, the Coffee Shops category
phone mode (Y page 133).
is selected.
i Call is available if the personal POI has a
The personal points of interest for this cate-
telephone number and a mobile phone is
gory are shown.
connected to COMAND (Y page 126).
X To delete a personal POI: select Delete
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the point of interest.
If you select Yes
Yes, the personal POI is
deleted.
If you select No
celed.
X Select a personal POI and press W to con-

firm. Search & Send
X To rename a personal POI: select Notes
Rename and press W to confirm.
i To use Search & Send, your vehicle needs
X To change the category: select Change to be equipped with mbrace, a navigation
Category and press W to confirm. system and a valid mbrace subscription.
Route guidance 87
Search & Send is a service assisting you in mation individually for every address to be
entering destinations for the navigation sys- downloaded.
tem. This mbrace service can send a destina-
tion address directly from the Google
Maps® website to the navigation system of
your vehicle.
Selecting and sending a destination

address
Navigation
Please also refer to the notes about address
entry online: maps.google.com.
X Call up the maps.google.com website and
X Select Yes when the prompt for starting the
enter the destination address in the
navigation system is shown. The window
address entry field.
for starting the navigation system appears
X Click the corresponding button to send the
(Y page 69).
destination address to the e-mail address
X Select Start
Start.
registered with mbrace.
X Enter the e-mail address you specified
or
X Select No to store the downloaded desti-
when setting up your mbrace account into
the corresponding field in the "Send" dialog nation in the destination memory for later
window. use.
X Click "Send". i The destination addresses are down-
loaded in the same order as they are sent.
If you own several Mercedes-Benz vehicles
Calling up destination addresses equipped with mbrace and a valid sub-
scriber account: each destination address
can be downloaded by each vehicle. This
requires each vehicle to be registered with
an e-mail address in your mbrace account.
Route guidance
Important notes
COMAND calculates the route to the destina-
tion without taking account of the following,
for example:
XPress the ï mbrace information button.
Rtrafficlights
Downloading of the destination address to
the navigation system of your vehicle Rstop and yield signs
begins. Rmerging lanes
i If you have sent more than one destina- Rparking or stopping in a no parking/no
tion address to your vehicle's navigation stopping zone
system, you will need to call up the infor- Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
Rnarrow bridges
Z
88 Route guidance
COMAND may give differing navigation com-

mands if the actual street/traffic situation
does not correspond with the digital map's
data. For example, if the road layout or the
direction of a one-way street has been
changed.
For this reason, you must always observe
road and traffic rules and regulations during
your journey. Road and traffic rules and reg-
ulations always have priority over the sys-
tem's driving recommendations.
Navigation
Example: preparation phase

Route guidance begins once a route has been : Next road
calculated (Y page 69).
; Point at which the change of direction
COMAND guides you to your destination by
takes place (light blue dot)
means of navigation announcements in the
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
form of audible navigation announcements
and route guidance displays. angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
The route guidance displays can be seen if the
? Current road
display is switched to navigation mode.
If you do not follow the navigation announce- Display ? depends on the setting selected
ments or if you leave the calculated route, for "Map information in the display"
COMAND automatically calculates a new (Y page 111).
route to the destination. COMAND prepares you for the upcoming
If the digital map contains the corresponding change of direction. Based on the example
information, the following applies: display below, the change of direction is
Rduring route guidance, COMAND tries to announced by the Prepare to turn
avoid roads with restricted access. Those right message. You see the full-screen map.
roads, for example, that are closed to
through-traffic.
Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
considered for route guidance on days
when they are open. For this purpose, the
relevant times must be correctly stored in
the database.
Displays during route guidance

Example: announcement phase
Change of direction : Next road
; Change of direction (turn right here)
Changes of direction have three phases:
= Graphic representation of the distance to
Rpreparation phase
the next change of direction
Rannouncement phase
? Distance to the next change of direction
Rchange-of-direction phase
Route guidance 89
A Route (highlighted in blue, shown in both COMAND announces the imminent change of
the left and right displays) direction.
B Point at which the change of direction Based on the example display below, the
takes place (light blue dot, shown in both change of direction is announced 150 ft
the left and right displays) before the change of direction with the Now
turn right message.
i The filled-in section of visual display for
distance = gets shorter the nearer you get The display is split into two halves, as in the
announcement phase.
to the announced change of direction.
Once the change of direction is completed,
COMAND announces the imminent change of COMAND automatically switches back to full-
direction. Based on the example display
Navigation
screen display.
below, the change of direction is announced
beforehand by the message: Please turn Example of a display without changes
right in 500 ft. and follow the of direction
<road name>.
name>
The distance announced before the next
change of direction depends on the type of
road and its permissible maximum speed.
The display is now split into two sectors. In
the left half, you see the normal map view.
The right-hand half shows:
Ran enlarged section of the area around the
intersection (crossing zoom) or
Ra 3D image of the road's course with the
route indicating the next change of direc-
: Route (highlighted in blue)
tion
; Current vehicle position
= Current road
? Map orientation selected
A Map scale selected
Example: change-of-direction phase

: Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
; Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
= Distance to the next change of direction
Z
90 Route guidance
Lane recommendations Display and description of lane recom-

mendations
Lane Day Night

mode mode
Recommended lane Dark Light
In this lane, you will blue blue
be able to complete
the next two
changes of direction
Navigation
without changing
lanes.
Example: lane recommendations
: Point of the next change of direction Possible lane Light Dark
; Point of the change of direction after next In this lane, you will blue blue
only be able to com-
= Next change of direction (in this case, turn
plete the next
off to the right)
change of direction
? Graphic representation of the distance to
without changing
the next change of direction lanes.
A Distance to the next change of direction
B Possible lane (light blue) Lane not recom- Light Gray
mended brown or
C Recommended lane (dark blue) light gray
In this lane, you will
D Lane not recommended (gray) not be able to com-
E Current vehicle position, the tip of the tri- plete the next
angle indicating the vehicle’s direction of change of direction
travel without changing
On multi-lane roads, COMAND can display lanes.
lane recommendations for the next change of
direction. The corresponding data must be i The colors used in the lane recommenda-
available in the digital map. tion display vary depending on whether day
COMAND displays lane recommendation C or night mode is switched on.
based on the next two changes of direction.
The number of lanes applies to the point at
which the next change of direction is
required.
i The multifunction display also shows lane
recommendations.
Only the recommended lanes are displayed
here, see the separate vehicle Operator's
Manual.
Route guidance 91
HOV or carpool lanes X Select RPT in the navigation system menu

bar by turning cVd the COMAND control-
ler and press W to confirm.
Switching navigation announcements

on/off
X To switch off: press the 8 button dur-
ing an announcement.
You will briefly see the message: The
guidance instructions have been
Navigation
muted.
: HOV symbol on the road sign X To switch on: press W the COMAND con-
; HOV symbol on the car pool lane troller.
A route may be calculated taking the use of XSelect RPT in the navigation system menu
HOV or carpool lanes into account. You can bar by turning cVd the COMAND control-
use HOV or carpool lanes depending on the ler and press W to confirm.
number of persons in the vehicle as well as
i COMAND automatically switches the nav-
the local and time limitation conditions.
igation announcements back on when:
i This information is stored in the map data. Ryou have a new route calculated.
i You can enter the number of people in the Ryou switch COMAND on again or start the
vehicle (Y page 62). In this section, you can engine.
also find more information on HOV or car-
pool lanes. Switching announcements and audio
If the system guides you to or from a carpool fadeout on/off
lane, COMAND provides you with visual and X Select Navi in the main function bar by
acoustic driving instructions. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
X Select Announcements and press W to
Navigation announcements
confirm.
Repeating navigation announcements A menu appears.
Navigation announcements are intended to You can activate/deactivate the following
direct you while driving without diverting your functions:
attention from the road and driving. Please RAnnounce Street Names
always use this feature instead of consulting Street names are announced during
the map display for directions. The symbols route guidance.
or the map display could distract you from RAudible Info During Phone Call
traffic conditions and driving.
During a phone call, navigation
If you have missed an announcement, you can
announcements and traffic reports are
call up the current announcement at any
audible in the background.
time.
RAudio Fadeout
controller.
Z
92 Route guidance
The volume of an active audio or video Canceling route guidance

source is automatically reduced during a
navigation announcement. Canceling or continuing route guidance
RGas on Reserve X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Once you have reached reserve fuel Ø button.
level, you will see a prompt asking X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
whether you wish to start the search for controller.
a gas station (Y page 76). X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
X Select the function and press W to confirm.
Switch the function on O or off ª. COMAND controller and press W to con-
Navigation
firm.
Setting the volume manually X To cancel route guidance: select Cancel
X Adjust the volume using the q control Route Guidance and press W to confirm.
knob during a navigation announcement. or
or X To continue route guidance: select Con‐
X Select RPT in the map view with the menu tinue Route Guidance and press W to
shown and adjust the volume using the confirm.
q control knob. COMAND calculates the route.
Announce Street Names Destination or area of destination

reached
If the function is switched on, the name of the
street which you are turning into is When you reach your destination, COMAND
announced. displays a checkered flag and route guidance
Announcements are not made in the chosen is automatically ended.
language in all countries. They are made when If the destination is not in close proximity to
relevant street names for the selected lan- a digitized street, the Area of destina‐
guage are available in the database. tion reached message appears when the
X To switch to navigation mode: press the destination is reached.
Ø button.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND Influencing route guidance
controller.
Avoiding a section of the route blocked
X Select Navi in the main function bar by by a traffic jam
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm. This function blocks a section of the route
ahead of you. You can set the length of the
X Select Announce Street Names and press blocked route section. If possible, COMAND
W to confirm. calculates a detour around the blocked sec-
The function is switched on O or off ª, tion of the route.
depending on the previous status. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
controller.
Route guidance 93
X Select Route in the navigation system X Select Alternative Route and press W
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND to confirm.
X Select Detour and press W to confirm.
X To block a section of the route: select
Longer or Shorter repeatedly and press
W to confirm until the desired section has
been selected.
i The total length of the section that can be
blocked is defined by the digital map. The
Navigation
menu items are available accordingly.
X To delete the blocked section: select
Delete while the message is shown and
press W to confirm.
COMAND calculates the route without the
block.
Selecting an alternative route

With the "Alternative Route" function, routes
other than the original one can be calculated.
Examples for route 1 (above) and route 4 (eco
Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the current route)
settings for the route type and route options
and are shown with a dark blue line Option 2:
(Y page 62). X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Route 4 is the economic route (eco route) and Ø button.
is shown with a green line. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
On the right-hand side, you will see informa- controller.
tion on the currently selected alternative
route, e.g. distance, estimated remaining X Select Navi in the main function bar by
driving time and estimated time of arrival. sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
Route sections used (e.g. highways, tunnels) press W to confirm.
are displayed as symbols. X Select Calculate Alternative Routes
Option 1 and press W to confirm.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the The function is switched on O or off ª,
Ø button. depending on the previous status.
Function is activated: alternative routes
are calculated directly after the destination
controller. is entered.
X Select Route in the navigation system
Z
94 Route guidance
Menu functions X To close the destination information:

X To select the next or previous alterna- slide XVY the COMAND controller or press
tive route: select Next or Previous and the k back button.
press W to confirm. i You can display destination information
X To start route guidance using the for the destination, for both way points and
selected alternative route: select Start for the intermediate stop, if they are part of
and press W to confirm. the route.
COMAND begins route guidance on the If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND
selected alternative route. and a phone number is included in the des-
tination information, you can call it
Navigation
(Y page 126).
Route information
Route overview
Displaying destination information
You can use the route overview to move along
the active route section by section and view
information and details about each section of
the route.
You can see information relevant to the sec-
tion of the route, such as the length of the
road section you will be driving along and the
road name. The highlighted route section is
marked in white with a red border on the map.
Ø button.
Example: destination information
The example shows information on distance, controller.
estimated time of arrival and estimated
remaining driving time to the destination O X Select Route in the navigation system
and two way points. menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
Ø button. X Select Route Browser and press W to
confirm.
controller. X To view the next or previous route sec-
tion: select Next or Previous and press
X Select Route in the navigation system
W to confirm.
controller and press W to confirm. i If the first or last route section is high-
lighted, you cannot select Previous or
X Select Destination Information and Next
Next.
press W to confirm. X To zoom in or out of the map: select N
Destination information is displayed.
or M and press W to confirm.
X To call up further destination informa-
X To close the route overview: select
tion: turn cVd the COMAND controller.
Back and press W to confirm.
Route guidance 95
Route demonstration
Navigation
Example: route display stopped
: Road name and city display when route
You can see the route before starting your display has been stopped
journey. This function is only available when
; Distance of the crosshair from current
the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle position
X To get to the current vehicle position:
Ø button.
press W to confirm the symbol for the cur-
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND rent vehicle position.
controller. X To change the map scale: select Scale
X Select Route in the navigation system and press W to confirm.
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND The scale bar appears.
controller and press W to confirm. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
X Select Route Demonstration and press press W to confirm.

W to confirm.
The map with the crosshair appears.
Recording the route
X To get to the destination: press W to
confirm the highlighted symbol. Notes
X To stop the route demonstration: con- If you have activated COMAND and the SD
firm the Ë symbol by pressing W. memory card has been inserted, you should
not take it out of the slot.
You can store up to 100 routes.
When you record a route, COMAND uses so-
called support points and displays the route
as a series of lines. If the route is then calcu-
lated, COMAND attempts to align the
recorded route with the digital map.
The support points of the route may not be on
a digitized road.
This is often the case for routes that have
been calculated using map data from other
sources.
Z
96 Route guidance
Calling up the Routes menu X To end recording: select Stop Record‐

ing in the Routes menu by turning cVd the
firm.
Displaying and editing the recorded

route
Navigation

Ø button.
controller.
X Select Destination in the navigation sys- X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 191).
tem menu bar by turning cVd the X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96).
COMAND controller and press W to con- X Select List in the Routes menu by turning
firm.
X Select Routes
Routes. W to confirm.
Previously recorded routes are displayed.
Starting/ending recording
X Select a route and press W to confirm.

X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96). The map appears with a menu. The
X To start recording : select Start recorded route is shown in the map with a
Recording in the Routes menu by turning blue dotted line.
cVd the COMAND controller and press X To view a demonstration of the route
W to confirm. on the map: select Demo by turning cVd
During the recording, the recorded route is
shown behind the current vehicle position
with gray strokes (symbol for tire tracks).
Route guidance 97
the COMAND controller and press W to X Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd
confirm. the COMAND controller and press W to
The map with the crosshair appears. confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Route dem-
X To delete a route: select Delete in the
onstration" section (Y page 95). menu by turning cVd the COMAND con-
X To begin route calculation: select Start troller and press W to confirm.
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND A prompt appears asking whether the route
controller and press W to confirm. should be deleted.
COMAND attempts to align the recorded X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
route with the digital map. If you select Yes
Yes, the route will be deleted.
Navigation
If you select No
celed.
Scanning the memory

The SD memory card is inserted.
X Call up the Routes menu (Y page 96).
X Select Memory Info in the Routes menu by
press W to confirm.
A message such as Off-road Route Mem‐
Changing route names and icons ory 90% Full. is displayed.
X Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm. Off-road and off-map
X To change the route name: select Notes
Rename and press W to confirm.
The navigation system may guide you to off-
i The name cannot be changed while the road routes that your vehicle cannot drive on
vehicle is in motion. without causing damage to the tires or wheels
X To change the icon: select Change Icon or the vehicle itself. It is the driver’s sole
and press W to confirm. responsibility to determine the suitability of
Observe the further information on managing the route. The condition of the off-road routes
categories for personal POIs (Y page 83). may vary, and their drivability may be affected
by different factors such as time of day, sea-
To change direction for route calcula-
son and current weather conditions, which
tion: you can set the icon for the route to the
the navigation system cannot judge or take
starting point or to the destination, thereby into account.
changing the direction for route calculation.
During route calculation, one-way streets or
turn restrictions, for example, are taken into
account. Therefore, the outward and return
routes may differ from each other.
Z
98 Route guidance
Route guidance to a destination that is the vehicle is in an off-road location.

not on a digitized road COMAND is also able to guide you to a des-
tination even from an off-road location.
At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Off Mapped Road message, an arrow and
the distance to the destination. The arrow
shows the compass heading to the actual
destination.
The route is highlighted blue, starting from
the last recognized street the vehicle was on
Navigation
before it left the map.

As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance contin-
Example: route guidance to an off-road destination ues in the usual way.
: Off-road destination
; Off-road route section (blue dashes) Route guidance from an off-map loca-
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri- tion to a destination
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of If the vehicle position is outside the area cov-
travel) ered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in
? Off-road (if available) an off-map location. COMAND is also able to
COMAND can guide you to destinations guide you to a destination even from an off-
which are within the area of the digital map, map location.
but which are not themselves recorded on the At the start of route guidance, you will see the
map. Off Mapped Road message, an arrow and
These destinations are known as off-road the distance to the destination. The direction
destinations, which you can enter using the arrow shows the compass heading to the des-
map, for example. In these cases, COMAND tination.
guides you for as long as possible with navi- The route is highlighted in blue from the near-
gation announcements and displays on roads est road known to the system.
known to the system. As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
If the vehicle reaches an area which is not part known to the system, route guidance contin-
of the digital map, the display appears as a ues in the usual way.
split-screen view. On the right, an arrow
appears that points to off-road destina- Off-road during route guidance
tion :. You will hear the announcement:
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be
"Please follow the arrow on the display". As
differences between the data on the digital
the vehicle approaches the destination, the
map and the actual course of the road.
Area of destination reached message
appears. In such cases, the system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the
Route guidance from an off-road loca- digital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-
tion to a destination road position.
In the display, you will see the Off Mapped
If the vehicle position is within the area cov- Road message, an arrow and the distance to
ered by the digital map, but the map does not the destination. The direction arrow shows
contain any information about that location, the compass heading to the destination.
Traffic reports 99
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
position to the map again, route guidance controller and, when the Full Screen
continues in the usual way. menu item is shown, press W to confirm.
The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-
play.
Traffic reports
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until the
Prerequisites desired map scale is set.
i This function is currently not available for
Canada.
Navigation
To receive real-time traffic reports via satel-
lite radio, you require:
Roptional satellite radio equipment
Ra subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio
Traffic Message Service
Further information on satellite radio
(Y page 182).
COMAND can receive traffic reports via sat-
ellite radio and take account of these for
route guidance in the navigation system.
Received traffic reports are displayed on the
map either as text or as symbols.
Real-time traffic reports on the map
: Delimits the section of the route affected

; Indicates an incident on the route (traffic
flow)
= Destination
? Map scale
COMAND can show certain traffic incidents
on the map. Traffic reports are shown on the
map at scales of 0.05 mi to 20 mi.
Z
100 Traffic reports
Symbols used in real-time traffic reports

Unimpeded traffic flow
Green line with arrows
The arrows can be seen on a map scale of 200 m (0.25 mi) and smaller.
Heavy/slow-moving traffic
Together with a yellow line
The symbol marks average speeds of 25 – 45 mph (40 – 72 km/h).
Caution, traffic incident
Navigation
Traffic jam
Together with a red line and arrows
The symbol marks average speeds of 5 - 20 mph (8 - 32 km/h).
Warning message
Together with a red/white striped line and arrows
Blocked route section
Possibly in combination with X X X X
Displaying real-time traffic reports Traffic symbol information

Starting a search for traffic reports
Ø button.
controller.
X Select Traffic by turning cVd the
firm.
A menu appears.
If No Traffic Messages appears, this Example display
means either: : Affected roads with indication of direction
Rno traffic reports have been received yet, ; Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow
or message
Rno traffic reports are available. X To switch to navigation mode: press the
X To end the search: select Cancel and Ø button.
press W to confirm. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
X To close the report window: select OK controller.

Traffic reports 101
X Select Traffic in the navigation system Displaying reports on the route

X Select Traffic Symbol Information by
press W to confirm.
X Select Next or Previous by turning cVd
confirm in order to continue highlighting
traffic symbols.
Navigation
X To change the map scale: select Map by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and : State/province for the calculated route,
press W to confirm. road designation, direction and reports
You can now zoom in or out of the map. for the affected road (2/3)
; Section of the road to which the traffic
report applies
= Traffic report
? Type of traffic report (slow-moving traffic)
Ø button.
controller.
X Select Traffic in the navigation system
Example: details on traffic symbol information
X To show the detailed view: select
X Select Messages On Route and press W
to confirm.
X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the
The traffic report window appears. If there
COMAND controller. is more than one traffic report for a section
of the route, this is indicated by 2/3, for
example.
X To scroll within a report or to access
the next report: turn c Vd the COMAND
controller.
X To return to the report list: slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
Z
102 Traffic reports
Displaying all traffic reports You can select the following text reader prop-
erties:
RLanguage (Y page 45)
RText reader speed (Y page 44)
You can start the text reader function man-
ually or set it to automatic.
Starting the text reader function man-

ually
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Navigation
X
Ø button.
X To switch to navigation mode: press the X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
Ø button.
controller.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND X Select Traffic by turning cVd the
controller. COMAND controller and press W to con-
X Select Traffic in the navigation system firm.
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND X Select Read out all messages on
controller and press W to confirm. route and press W to confirm.
COMAND reads out the reports in
X Select All Messages and press W to con- sequence.
firm.
i If there are no reports for the route, the
A list is shown containing all roads, areas
or regions affected by traffic reports. Read out all messages on route menu
Roads, areas or regions not on the route item is shown in gray and cannot be
also appear in the list. selected.
X To switch off the read-aloud function:
X To show a traffic report: select a road, select Cancel Read-Aloud Function and
area or region and press W to confirm. press W to confirm or press the 8 but-
The traffic report is displayed. There may ton.
be several traffic reports for the affected COMAND reads out the current report and
road. You can find an example of a traffic then exits the read-aloud function.
report here: (Y page 101).
X To close a report: slide XVY the COMAND Automatic read-aloud function
controller.
Ø button.
Reading out traffic reports on the
route
Introduction
The read-aloud function is only available while
route guidance is active. It reads out traffic
reports affecting the current route.
Destination memory 103
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND Destination memory

controller.
X Select Traffic by sliding ZV and turning
Home address (My Address)
cVd the COMAND controller and press Entering the home address via address
W to confirm. entry
X Select Read Traffic Messages Auto‐
X Proceed as described under “Adopting an
matically and press W to confirm. address book entry as a home address”
Depending on the previous state, switch (Y page 103). Confirm My Address by
the option on O or off ª. pressing W.
X To enter the home address for the first
Navigation
time: confirm New Entry by pressing W.
Recalculating the route dynamically
X To change the home address: select
Change in the menu showing the home
address by turning cVd the COMAND con-
X Confirm New Entry by pressing W.
X In both cases, enter the home address as a
destination, e.g. as a city, street and house
number (Y page 64). Then, save the home
address (Y page 69).
Adopting an address book entry as a

The route types Dynamic Traffic Route home address
and Dynamic TRF. Route Only After X To switch to navigation mode: press the
Request take all relevant traffic messages
Ø button.
into account when calculating a route
(Y page 62). X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
If you have set the route type Dynamic Traf‐ controller.
fic Route,
Route COMAND guides you on the X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
updated route to your destination. tem menu bar by turning cVd the
If you have set the route type Dynamic TRF. COMAND controller and press W to con-
Route Only After Request,
Request a prompt firm.
appears.
X Select From Memory and press W to con-
You can now decide whether to:
firm.
Raccept the route suggested by COMAND You will see the destination memory list
Rcontinue your original route either with the character bar (option 1) or
X To accept the suggested route: press as a selection list (option 2).
W the COMAND controller. Option 1: destination memory list with
X To continue along the original route: character bar
select Reject by turning cVd the
firm.
Z
104 Destination memory
X To enter the home address for the first

time: select Assign to Address Book
Entry and press W to confirm.
X Select Home
Home, Work or Not Classified and
press W to confirm.
X To change the home address: select
Change and press W to confirm.
X Select Assign to Address Book Entry
Navigation
X Slide VZ the COMAND controller repeat- i If you select New Entry,

Entry you are also
edly until the destination memory list offered the option of changing the home
appears as a selection list. address by entering an address. You can
then save the home address without having
Option 2: destination memory list as to start route guidance.
selection list
X Select Home
Home, Work or Not Classified and
press W to confirm.
In both cases, you will see the address book
either with the character bar or as a selec-
tion list.
X Select an address book entry
(Y page 148).
X To confirm the selection: press W the
COMAND controller.
If there is no existing home address,
COMAND saves the entry. You will see a
The My Address entry is listed as the first message and then the address menu with
entry in the destination memory. the selected address. Start is highlighted
X Select My Address by turning cVd the automatically.
COMAND controller and press W to con- If a home address has already been stored,
firm. you will see a prompt asking you whether
i If you have not yet entered any charac- the My Address entry should be overwrit-
ters, My Address is automatically high- ten.
lighted in the selection list. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If no home address has been stored yet, you If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND overwrites the
can now assign an address book entry. If a destination. You will see a message and
home address already exists, it is displayed then the address menu with the selected
and you can alter it. address. Start is highlighted automati-
i If you select New Entry,
Entry you are also cally.
offered the option of entering the home If you select No
No, the list will appear again.
address for the first time. You can then
save the home address without having to
start route guidance.
Destination memory 105
Selecting the home address for route X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
guidance tem menu bar by turning cVd the
X Proceed as described under "Selecting a
destination from the destination memory" firm.
(Y page 70). X Select From Last Destinations and
press W to confirm.
The list of last destinations appears.
Save destination X Select a destination by turning cVd the
General notes COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
Navigation
This function also stores the destination in The destination address is shown.
the address book.
When the address book is full, no destinations X Select Save and press W to confirm.
can be saved in the destination memory. You You can now select storing options
must first delete address book entries (Y page 105).
(Y page 149).
Selecting storing options
After destination entry
Once you have chosen one of the following
X The destination has been entered and is options for storing a destination, you can
shown in the address entry menu specify storage options:
(Y page 64). RAfterdestination entry (Y page 105)
X Select Save by sliding VÆ and turning RDuring route guidance (Y page 105)
cVd the COMAND controller and press RFrom the list of previous destinations
W to confirm. (Y page 70)
You can now select storing options
(Y page 105).
During route guidance

controller.
firm.
Storage options
X Select Save Destination and press W to
confirm. X To save the destination without a
You can now select storing options name: select Save Without Name and
(Y page 105). press W to confirm.
COMAND stores the destination in the des-
tination memory and uses the address as
From the list of previous destinations
the destination name.
controller.
Z
106 Destination memory
will appear asking whether you wish to

overwrite the existing data.
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND stores the data.
You can now start route guidance to this
address directly from the address book
(Y page 151).
X To save the destination as My address:
select Save as "My Address" and press
W to confirm.
Navigation
Example: saving a destination with a name

COMAND stores the destination in the des-
: Selected data field with cursor
tination memory as My Address.
Address If the
; Character bar selected address book entry already con-
X To save the destination with a name: tains address data that can be used for
select Save With Name and press W to navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear
confirm. asking whether you wish to overwrite the
existing data.
X Select a category, e.g. Home
Home, and press W
to confirm.
If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is overwritten.
The input menu appears with data fields
If you select No
and the character bar.
celed.
X Proceed as described under "Character
X To save the destination as a personal
entry (navigation)" (Y page 36).
POI: insert the SD memory card
X Then select ¬ and press W to confirm.
(Y page 191).
COMAND stores the destination under the
X Select Save As Personal POI and press
name entered.
W to confirm.
An address with complete address data that X Select a category.
is suitable for navigation can be assigned to
X Enter the name.
a pre-existing address book entry.
The current address is saved as a personal
X To assign an address to an address
point of interest on the SD memory card.
book entry: select Assign to Address
Book Entry and press W to confirm.
X Select a category, e.g. Home
Home, and press W Deleting a destination or the home
to confirm. address
You will see the address book either with X To switch to navigation mode: press the
the character bar or as a selection list. Ø button.
X Select an address book entry X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
(Y page 148).
controller.
COMAND stores the data if the address
book entry selected does not yet contain X Select Destination in the navigation sys-
navigable address data. tem menu bar by turning cVd the
If the selected address book entry already COMAND controller and press W to con-
contains navigable address data, a prompt firm.
Previous destinations 107
X Select From Memory and press W to con- Storing a destination permanently in

firm. the destination memory
You will see the destination memory list
X Proceed as described in the "From the list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
of previous destinations" section
as a selection list (option 2).
(Y page 70).
X Option 1: destination memory list with
the character bar: enter characters using
the character bar (Y page 36). Storing the vehicle position in the list
X Option 2: destination memory list as of previous destinations
selection list: select a destination by turn- To switch on navigation mode: press the
Navigation
X
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press Ø function button.
W to confirm. X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
You see the address data of the selected
controller.
entry.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm. menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
A prompt appears asking whether you wish controller and press W to confirm.
to delete the destination. X Select Save Vehicle Position and press
XSelect Yes or No and press W to confirm. W to confirm.
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND deletes the COMAND stores the current vehicle posi-
destination. You will see a message to this tion as a destination in the list of previous
effect. destinations.
If you select No
celed.
i If the navigable address data for the des- Storing the crosshair position in the
tination being deleted is also assigned to list of previous destinations
an address book entry, COMAND will also A crosshair appears on the map if you have
delete this data from there. If the corre- moved the map manually (Y page 108). You
sponding address book entry does not con- can store the crosshair position as a destina-
tain any further data, such as telephone tion in the list of previous destinations.
numbers, COMAND deletes the entire X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
address book entry.
controller.
Previous destinations menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND

Introduction X Select Save Crosshair Position and
COMAND automatically stores the previous press W to confirm.
destinations for which route calculation has
been started. If the memory is full, COMAND
deletes the oldest destination. You can also
save a destination from the list of previous
destinations in the destination memory. It will
be stored there permanently.
Z
108 Map operation and map settings
Deleting one of the previous destina- Setting the map scale

tions
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
controller.
tem menu bar by turning cVd the : Set map scale as a number with unit
; Currently set map scale as indicated by
firm.
Navigation
the needle on the scale bar

X Select From Last Destinations and
= New map scale
press W to confirm.
? Scale bar
The list of last destinations appears.
X Select the desired destination and press Unit of measurement : in the COMAND dis-
W to confirm. play depends on the selection made in the
The destination address appears. instrument cluster; see the separate vehicle
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
Operator's Manual.
A prompt appears asking whether the entry X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
should be deleted. controller and, when the Full Screen

X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. menu item is shown, press W.
If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is deleted. X To call up the scale bar: as soon as you
If you select No
No, the process will be can- turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale
celed. bar = appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Map operation and map settings

General notes Moving the map
Company logos displayed on the map are Showing the crosshair
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
locations of these companies. The use of such
logos on the map does not indicate approval
of, support of or advertising by these compa-
nies for the navigation system itself.
Map with crosshair

: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
Map operation and map settings 109
= Details of the crosshair position and an intermediate stop, the map can also
? Map scale selected be set to these positions.
X To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller.
controller and, when the Full Screen
menu item is shown, press W. X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY,
ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller.
confirm.
A crosshair appears on the map. If you slide
it again, the map under the crosshair moves X Select Destination Position Map and
Navigation
in the corresponding direction. press W to confirm.
Display = may be the name of a street, for The crosshair position is set to the relevant
destination.
example, provided the digital map contains
the necessary data. It shows the geo-coordi-
nate position of the crosshair if the Geo-
coordinates display is switched on Map settings
(Y page 111). Calling up the map settings menu
Hiding the crosshair and centering the X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
map on the vehicle position or destina- controller.
tion X Select Navi in the main function bar by
X Press the % back button twice. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
The crosshair disappears and the map is controller and press W to confirm.
set to the vehicle position. X Select Map Settings and press W to con-
firm.
Centering the map on the vehicle's posi- The map settings menu appears.
tion
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND Map orientation
controller.
confirm.
X Select Vehicle Position Map and press
W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown, Example: map orientation
press the % back button. : Current map orientation (0 or ¤)
This hides the crosshair.
Possible map orientations:
R0 North orientation (The map view is dis-
Centering the map on the destination
position played so that north is always up)
R¤ Heading orientation (the map view is
This function requires a calculated route to a aligned to the direction of travel. The direc-
destination. If the route includes way points tion of travel is always at the top, the
Z
orange-color tip of the symbol points Selecting POI symbols

north.)
R¤ Bird's-eye view (the map view is aligned
to the direction of travel. The map projec-
tion reproduces the curvature of the earth's
surface, the orange-color tip of the symbol
points north.)
R¤ 3D map (the map view is aligned to the
direction of travel. At a scale of 1 km the
map displays elevation, the orange-color
Navigation
tip of the symbol points north.)
Setting the POI symbol display

You can set the points of interest you wish to
have displayed as symbols on the map. Points
of interest are, for example, gas stations,
hotels, cinemas and restaurants.
controller.
Map orientation menu controller and press W to confirm.
Setting the map orientation X Select Map Settings and press W to con-
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND firm.
controller. The map settings menu appears.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by X Select POI Symbols On Map and press
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND W to confirm.
controller and press W to confirm. The following settings are possible:
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- RStandard Symbols
firm. Symbol display determined by the factory
The map settings menu appears. settings.
RPersonal Symbols
X Select Map Orientation and press W to
confirm. You can determine the symbols yourself.
X Select North up, RNo Symbols
up Heading Up,
Up Bird's-
eye View or 3-D Map by turning cVd the The map does not show any symbols.
firm.
A # dot indicates the new setting.
Selecting map information

Map information in the display
During route guidance, you can have map
information shown at the bottom edge of the
display.
controller.
Navigation
X Select Standard Symbols,
Symbols Personal
X Select Map Settings and press W to con-
Symbols or No Symbols.
Symbols
If you select Personal Symbols,
Symbols the POI firm.
list appears. The map settings menu appears.
X Select Text Information On Map and
X To switch the symbol display on/off: press W to confirm.
select a POI by turning cVd the COMAND
A # dot indicates the current setting.
Depending on the previous state of the X Select Current Street,
Street Geo-coordi‐
symbols, they will either be shown O or nates or None and press W to confirm.
hidden ª. You can switch on the symbol X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
displays for more than one point of interest. controller.
X To switch all personal symbols on/off:
select All and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status of the
symbols, they will either be shown O or
hidden ª.
If the function is switched on O, the indi-
vidual POIs are grayed out and the previ-
ously selected settings remain unchanged. Road display
If the function is switched off ª, you can : Road names or numbers, e.g. for high-
reselect the individual POIs. They show the ways
most recently selected settings.
i The list shows all symbols that are con-
tained on the digital map across all coun-
tries. However, not all points of interest are
available in all countries. As a result, certain
point of interest symbols may not be dis-
played on the map, even if the symbol dis-
play is switched on. Geo-coordinate display
: Current height above average sea level
(rounded to the nearest 10 m)
button.
; Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
nates
Z
= Current vehicle position: longitude coor- X Select Never

Never, When Off-Road or When
dinates Route Guidance Inactive and press W
? Number of GPS satellites currently being to confirm.
used The selected setting is accepted.
There must be sufficient GPS reception for all
displays to be shown. If this is not the case, Switching additional information on/
the display will be grayed out. Height dis- off
play : may vary from the actual value, Switching the topographic map on/off
because the navigation system uses the GPS
signals for the calculation.
controller.
Navigation
During the "Move map" function, you will see

the geo-coordinates of the crosshair position. X Select Navi in the main function bar by
Height display : and number of satellites sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
used ? are not displayed. controller and press W to confirm.
firm.
The map settings menu appears.
X Select Topographic Map and press W to
confirm.
Depending on the previous status, switch
Display switched off the option on O or off ª.
: Current map orientation The topographical map uses different colors
While moving the map, you will see additional to depict elevation. The color key generally
data, depending on the crosshair position, if reflects the topography's dominant vegeta-
the digital map supports this data. A street tion or the ground's perceived color when
name, for example, can be shown here seen from the air, for example:
(Y page 108). Rgreen (grass) for lowland
Ryellow, brown (woodland) for hills
Coordinates on the map Rgray (stone) and white (snow) for moun-
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND tains

controller.
firm.
X Select Compass On Map and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears. Example: highway information
Switching highway information on/off
When driving on the highway, you can see the X Select Navi in the main function bar by
following information on the right of the dis- sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
play: controller and press W to confirm.
Rthe nearest gas stations X Select Map Settings and press W to con-
Rthe nearest rest areas, etc. firm.
Rand their distance from the current vehicle The map settings menu appears.
position X Select City (3D) and press W to confirm.
The entries show the number of the high- Depending on the previous status, switch
way and the highway exits as well as their the option on O or off ª.
distance from the current vehicle position.
Navigation
The name of the highway exit continues to i The city model is only shown for "Bird's-
be displayed. eye View" or "3D Map".
X To switch to navigation mode: press the It is available in the 0.05 mi and 0.1 mi map
Ø button. scales.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND The data required for displaying buildings
is not available for all cities.
controller.
firm.
X Select Highway Information and press
W to confirm.
the option on O or off ª.
Example: intersecting roads on city routes/high-

ways
Example: city model
Showing/hiding intersecting streets
Switching city view on/off
If route guidance is inactive, intersecting
When the city model is switched on, the map streets can be shown on the upper edge of
shows buildings in 3D. the display.
controller.
Z
114 Additional settings
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND X Select Traffic Information On Map and
controller. press W to confirm.
X Select Incidents and/or Speed & Flow
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND and/or Free Flow and press W to con-
controller and press W to confirm. firm.
X Select Map Settings and press W to con- the option on O or off ª.
firm.
The map settings menu appears. Traffic Display on the map
information
X Select Next Intersecting Street and
Navigation
press W to confirm. Incidents Road sections with traffic

Depending on the previous status, switch incidents are illustrated
the option on O or off ª. with a yellow line and
arrows.
Speed & Road sections with traffic
Traffic information on the map Flow jams are represented by yel-
low or red lines.
Yellow lines: traffic jams,
average speed 25 - 45 mph
(40 - 72 km/h)
Red lines: traffic jams, aver-
age speed 5 - 20 mph
(8 - 32 km/h)
Free Flow Free flowing road sections
are illustrated with a green
line and arrows.
: Delimits the section of the route affected
; Indicates an incident on the route (traffic
flow) Additional settings
If you subscribe to the SIRIUS XM Satellite Avoiding an area
Radio Traffic Message Service, traffic infor-
mation can be displayed on the map. You can General information
select three categories for the display.
COMAND enables you to avoid areas you do
X To switch the display on/off: press W
not wish to drive through.
the COMAND controller to show the menu. If you activate or deactivate a route block
X Select Navi in the main function bar by while route guidance is active, COMAND will
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND calculate a new route. If you activate or deac-
controller and press W to confirm. tivate a route block while route guidance is
inactive, COMAND will use the new setting for
the next route guidance.
Additional settings 115
The calculated route may include an area to RDestination memory (Y page 70)
be avoided if: RListof categories for personal POIs
Ryour destination is located in such an area. (Y page 85)
Rthe route uses roads that lead through an X Select the desired destination or personal
area to be avoided. POI and press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
i Highways within blocked areas are always
taken into consideration in the route cal- select Continue and press W to confirm.
culation. The map appears.
The crosshair marks the center of the area
Defining an area for the first time that is to be avoided.
Navigation
X To scroll the weather map: slide XVY,
Ø button. ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND controller.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
controller. cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from
X Select Navi in the main function bar by the map; turning counter-clockwise zooms
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND in.
X Select Avoid Area and press W to con-
firm.
X To apply a block: press W the COMAND
If you have not previously blocked an area, controller.
a menu appears. A red square appears on the map.
X Select Using Map,

Map From Memory or From X To adjust the size of the square: turn
Personal POIs and press W to confirm. cVd the COMAND controller.
If you select Using Map,
Map the map with the The square is enlarged or reduced.
crosshair appears. X To confirm the settings: press W.
If you select From Memory or From Per‐ The list appears. The previously selected
sonal POIs,
POIs either the destination mem- area to be avoided has been added and
ory or the list of categories for POIs activated.
appears. You can also determine additional areas to be
avoided (Y page 116).
Z
Defining further areas X Select Using Map,

Map From Memory or From
Personal POIs and press W to confirm.
Ø button. If you select Using Map,
Map the map with the
crosshair appears.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND If you select From Memory or From Per‐
controller. sonal POIs,
POIs either the destination mem-
X Select Navi in the main function bar by ory or the list of categories for POIs
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND appears.
controller and press W to confirm. RDestination memory (Y page 70)
RList of categories for personal POIs
X Select Avoid Area and press W to con-
Navigation
(Y page 85)
firm.
X Select the desired destination or personal
If you have already selected one or more
areas to avoid, a list of areas appears. POI and press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
select Continue and press W to confirm.
The map appears.
X To avoid a new area: call up the area menu
again (Y page 115).
Switching an avoided area on/off

X Call up the area list (Y page 116).
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
Example: list of areas confirm.
i Available positions in the list are named The avoided area is switched on O or off
Empty and are shown in gray. ª depending on the previous status.
X Select Avoid New Area by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to Displaying and changing an avoided
confirm. area
A menu appears. X Call up the area list (Y page 116).
the COMAND controller.
X Slide VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Display / Change and press W to
confirm.
The area to be avoided is indicated in the
map.
X To change the location of the area: slide
XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND control-
ler.
The area is moved on the map.
X To adjust the size of the area: turn Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic
cVd the COMAND controller. report service
The area is enlarged or reduced. XCall the traffic report provider's phone
X To confirm the change: press W the number shown on the screen.
COMAND controller. i You can also have the satellite service
The list appears and the change is entered. activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS
XM Radio website at
Deleting a set area http://www.sirius.com (USA).
X Call up the area list (Y page 116). Once the connection has been established:
Navigation
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd X Follow the instructions of the operator.
the COMAND controller. The activation process may take up to ten
X Slide VY the COMAND controller and
minutes.
press W to confirm. If registration is not included when purchas-
ing the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
A query appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No
No. Compass function
If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is deleted.
You can view the current direction of travel,
If you select No
No, the process will be can- the current height and the coordinates of the
celed. current vehicle position in the compass view.
Ø button.
SIRIUS XM service
Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa- controller.
tion
You can display the SIRIUS XM service infor- menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
mation. the COMAND controller and press W to
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND confirm.
controller.
X Select Compass and press W to confirm.
X Select SIRIUS Service and press W to
confirm.
The window on the right half of the display
shows the telephone number of the pro-
vider (SIRIUS XM) and the serial number of
your service module.
Z

confirm.
X Select Country Information and press
W to confirm.
When the connection has been made, the
available country information appears.
X To return to navigation: press the %
button.
Navigation
Example: compass
: Current direction of travel
; Current height above average sea level Displaying the map data version
(rounded)
= Current vehicle position: longitude coor-
dinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
used
A Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
nates
B Currently set steering angle of the front
wheels
i To display current elevation ;, the sys-
tem must be able to receive at least four X To show the map data menu: press W
satellites. Steering angle B can be a max-
imum of 35° in both directions.
X To exit the display: confirm Back by press-
ing W or press the % back button.
X Select Map Version and press W to con-
Country-specific information firm.
The number of the map data version is
You can call up information on the traffic con-
shown. Information about new versions of
ditions in the country you are currently driving
the digital map can be obtained from an
in via the COMAND Internet and online func-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
tion.
The availability of information is country-
dependent. Information can include maxi-
Updating the digital map
mum speeds, driving with low-beam head-
lamps or legal alcohol limits, for example. Important safety notes
Ø button.
G WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
controller. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave vation code when you buy the navigation
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- DVD.
out sufficient ventilation. If you select No
celed.
Introduction X Enter the activation code.
After entering the activation code cor-
The digital maps generated by the map soft- rectly, COMAND starts updating the digital
ware become outdated in the same way as map. Once the update is finished, you will
conventional road maps. Optimal route guid- see a message.
ance can only be provided by the navigation
system in conjunction with the most up-to-
Navigation
date map software. COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized While the update is running, you will see a
Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the dig- message to this effect and a progress bar.
ital map updated there with a DVD, or you can The navigation system is not operational
update it yourself. until the update is complete.
i You cannot eject the DVD during the
Carrying out a manual update update. If you switch off COMAND during
the update, the update is interrupted. It
i The update process can take a long time then continues from where it was inter-
(over an hour), depending on the size of the rupted when the system is restarted.
digital map. During this time, you will only COMAND may prompt you to change the DVD
be able to switch on radio mode and to during the update.
accept incoming calls. The update will be
X Press the V (for DVD changer) or
completed more quickly if the vehicle is
stationary. 8 (for single DVD drive) load/eject but-
If you start the update with the engine ton.
switched off and the starter battery has X Take the DVD out of the slot.
insufficient power, COMAND may automat-
X Insert the requested DVD.
ically switch off. This protects the battery.
Once the update has been successfully
If this occurs, restart the update with the
completed, you will see a message to this
engine running.
effect.
X Insert the DVD:
Rin the single DVD drive (Y page 188)
COMAND controller.
Rin the DVD changer (Y page 188)
COMAND checks whether the digital map X Take the DVD out of the slot.
on the DVD is compatible with the naviga- The update is complete.
tion system and system software. If the update is not successfully completed,
A prompt then appears asking if you want you will see a message that the map update
to install the database. Versions of the is not possible.
database currently installed and the data- X To confirm the message: press W the
base that is to be installed are displayed. COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
After selecting Yes
Yes, an activation code
must be entered when installing a database
for the first time. You will receive the acti-
Z
120 Problems with the navigation system
Problems with the navigation system
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

COMAND is unable to Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more
continue route guid- than two hours.
ance after the journey "Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
has been interrupted. "Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on
and driving on.
X Continue route guidance (Y page 92).
Navigation

COMAND is unable to COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the
determine the vehicle's vehicle has been transported.
position. Example:
RAfter transporting the vehicle by ferry
RAfter transporting the vehicle by motorail
RAfter the vehicle has been towed
X Start the vehicle and pull away.

COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the
driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of
the vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with
navigation announcements and route guidance displays.
Problems with the navigation system 121

The Navigation COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is
Unavailable message stored.
appears. To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND
deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation
system will then be temporarily unavailable.
X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
Navigation
If an area of the hard disk has a malfunction, COMAND can no
longer access the map data in this area. This may occur when
calculating a route, for example.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
The navigation system will be operational again until it has to
access the faulty area of the hard drive once more. The message
will then reappear.
X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

You see a message The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update.
informing you that the X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller.
DVD containing the dig-
ital map is incompatible X Eject the DVD.
with the system soft- X Have the system database checked at an authorized Mercedes-
ware. Benz Center.

The map software The DVD is dirty.
update has failed. X Clean the DVD.
X Restart the update.
The DVD is scratched.

There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle

interior.
X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.
X Restart the update.
COMAND's integrated hard disk is defective.

Z
122 Problems with the navigation system

COMAND asks for an The digital map is secured with an activation code.
activation code during X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the map update.
Navigation
123
Your COMAND equipment ................ 124

General notes .................................... 124
Telephony via the Bluetooth® inter-
face .................................................... 125
Reception and transmission vol-
ume .................................................... 131
Using the telephone ......................... 132
Using the phone book ...................... 136
Using call lists ................................... 140
Using the speed dial list ................... 143
Text messages .................................. 144
Telephone
Using the address book ................... 147
124 General notes
Your COMAND equipment Introduction

COMAND provides telephony via the Blue-
These operating instructions describe all the
tooth® interface.
standard and optional equipment for your
COMAND system, as available at the time of When connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
going to print. Country-specific differences phones with PBAP (Phone Book Access
are possible. Please note that your Profile), the contacts are automatically down-
COMAND system may not be equipped with loaded to COMAND.
all the features described. With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the
hands-free system and receive vCards via the
Bluetooth® interface.
General notes You can use the text message function
Important safety notes (receiving and reading) if the mobile phone
Telephone
supports the MAP (Message Access Profile)

G WARNING Bluetooth® profile.
If you operate mobile communication equip- You can obtain more detailed information
ment while driving, you will be distracted from about suitable mobile phones and about con-
traffic conditions. You could also lose control necting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones to
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. COMAND on the Internet at
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
is stationary. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
center at
If you make a call on your mobile phone while 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for
driving, always use hands-free mode. Only the USA or at 1-800-387-0100 for Canada.
use the mobile phone when road, weather
and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdic-
tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile Call disconnection while the vehicle is
phone while driving a vehicle. in motion
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph A call may be disconnected if:
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
Rthere is insufficient network coverage in
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
per second. certain areas.
Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the area (cell) into another and no channels are
health of others. free.
Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by electromag- with the network available.
netic fields. You can reduce this risk by using
an exterior antenna.
Therefore, only use mobile communication Operating options
equipment if it is connected to the exterior You can operate the telephone by:
antenna of the vehicle. Rusing the COMAND controller:
turn c V d
slide XVY or ZVÆ
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface 125
press W X Enter the number on COMAND

Rusing the 6 or ~ button and using (Y page 132).
the telephone keypad on COMAND X Press 6.
Rusing the 6 or ~ button on the mul- The telephone makes the connection.
tifunction steering wheel X Wait until the emergency call center
Rusing the Voice Control System (see the answers and describe the emergency sit-
separate Voice Control System operating uation.
instructions)
Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and
illustrations in this section refer to COMAND. Telephony via the Bluetooth® inter-
face
Prerequisites
Telephone
For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth®
The telephone is not ready for use in the fol-
interface, a Bluetooth®-capable mobile
lowing situations:
phone is required.
RThe telephone automatically tries to log on
On COMAND
to a network. If no network is available, you
may not be able to make a "911" emer- X Activate the Bluetooth® function in
gency call. If you attempt to make an out- COMAND (Y page 45).
going call, the No Service message will On the mobile phone
appear for a short while.
X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the
PIN when prompted to do so (see the
"911" emergency call mobile phone operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® functions and, where
The 911 emergency call is a public service.
necessary, Bluetooth® visibility on the
Using it without due cause is a criminal
mobile phone (see the mobile phone oper-
offense.
ating instructions).
The following requirements must be fulfilled
for a 911 emergency call: The battery of the mobile phone should
always be kept sufficiently charged in order
Rthe mobile phone must be switched on. to prevent malfunctions.
Ra network must be available. In preparation for telephoning via the Blue-
Ra valid and operational SIM card must be
tooth® interface, you should check the fol-
inserted in the mobile phone. lowing items on your mobile phone (see the
Rthe mobile phone is connected to COMAND mobile phone operating instructions):
via Bluetooth®. RHands-Free Profile
If you cannot make an emergency call, you The mobile phone must support Hands-
must arrange rescue measures yourself. Free Profile 1.0 or above.
RBluetooth® visibility
On certain mobile phones, the device itself

must be made "visible" to other devices, as
well as activating the Bluetooth® function
(see the mobile phone operating instruc-
tions).
Z
126 Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
This visibility is for restricted periods of If the mobile phone supports PBAP (Phone
time on some mobile phones. Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
RBluetooth® device name Access Profile), the following contacts and
messages are downloaded into COMAND
Every Bluetooth® device has its own Blue-
when connecting:
tooth® device name. This device name is
freely definable, but can be identical for all Rphone book
devices from the same manufacturer. It is Rcall lists
therefore recommended that you change Rtext messages
this name so that you can easily recognize Further information on the conditions for con-
your mobile phone (see the mobile phone necting (Y page 125).
operating instructions).
i Not all mobile phones available on the
Telephone
market are equally suitable. You can obtain

more detailed information about suitable
mobile phones and about connecting Blue-
tooth®-capable mobile phones to
COMAND on the Internet at
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Cus-
tomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for
Canada).
i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
depend on the supported version of the
Hands-Free Profile.
Connecting a mobile phone

General information
Before using your mobile phone with
COMAND for the first time, you will need to:
Rsearch for it (Y page 127) and then
Rauthorize (register) it (Y page 128).
When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is
connected automatically.
You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones.
Searching for a mobile phone X Select Search for Phone from Vehi‐
cle and press the W button to confirm.
A message appears.
X Select Start Search and press the W
button to confirm.
The Searching for Bluetooth
Phones... message appears. COMAND
looks for Bluetooth® telephones within
range and adds them to the Bluetooth® tel-
ephones list.
If a new phone is found, it appears in the
list with the Ï symbol.
Empty Bluetooth® telephone list
Telephone
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® telephones within
range and their characteristics.
Symbols in the Bluetooth® phone list
Sym- Explanation
bol
Ï New mobile phone in range, but
not yet authorized
Y Authorized mobile phone
Conditions for searching
# Currently connected mobile
phone
Ñ Mobile phone in range and
authorized
Ñ Mobile phone not in range, but
(gray) already authorized
The Bluetooth® telephone list shows all

mobile phones within range and all previously
authorized mobile phones, whether or not
Bluetooth® telephone list after search is com- they are in range.
pleted
i If the Bluetooth® telephones list is already
X Press the % function button on
full, you will be requested to de-authorize a
COMAND. mobile phone (Y page 130). If COMAND
X Select Connect Dev. from the telephone does not find your mobile phone, external
basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning authorization may be necessary
c V d the COMAND controller and press (Y page 129).
W to confirm.
i If you call up the telephone list again, the
unauthorized devices are removed from the
Z
list. In this case, start a new search to i If you want to reauthorize a mobile phone
update the Bluetooth® telephone list. following deauthorization, you can select a
different passkey.
Authorizing (registering) a mobile i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authori-
phone zation in COMAND and on the mobile
phone (Y page 130). Subsequent authori-
zation may otherwise fail.
X To enter the passkey in COMAND: press
the number keys one after the other.
or
X Select the digits in the digit bar one by one
Telephone

¬ is highlighted after the first number
has been entered.
Passkey entry
X In both cases, select ¬ and press W to
confirm.
X To enter the passkey on the mobile
phone: if the Bluetooth® connection is suc-
cessful, you will be requested to enter the
passkey (access code, passcode; see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
X Enter the same passkey in the mobile
phone as the one already entered in
COMAND.
The Connecting Bluetooth Pro‐
Telephone basic menu files... message appears.
Option 1: using the passkey (access code) The Authorization successful mes-
X Select the mobile phone using the Ï sage appears once authorization is com-
symbol in the Bluetooth® telephone list by pleted.
turning cVd the COMAND controller and The mobile phone is connected to COMAND
press W to confirm. (authorized). You can now make phone calls
The input menu for the passkey appears. using the COMAND hands-free system.
The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit num- i After entering the passkey, you may also
ber combination which you can choose your- need to enter a confirmation in your mobile
self. You must enter the same number com- phone to connect calls. Please check your
bination in COMAND and in the Bluetooth®- mobile phone display. On some mobile
capable mobile phone (see the mobile phone phones, this confirmation can be saved. In
operating instructions). this case, you do not need to enter it again.
i Some mobile phones require a passkey If the COMAND display shows the Author‐
with four or more digits. ization failed message, you may have
exceeded the prescribed time period.
Repeat the procedure.
nection to COMAND again once you have

entered the passkey (see the mobile phone
operating instructions). The mobile phone
cannot otherwise be authorized.
X Press the % function button on
COMAND.
X Select Connect Dev. from the telephone
basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning
c V d the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Option 2: use Secure Simple Pairing The Bluetooth® telephone list appears.
The mobile phone (or the Bluetooth® audio X Select Connect via Phone and press W
Telephone
device) must support the Bluetooth® version to confirm.
2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing. The message on the left appears.
COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is X Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobile
displayed on both devices that are to be con- phone; see the mobile phone operating
nected. instructions.
X If the code is the same on both devices, X Select COMAND (MB MB Bluetooth)
Bluetooth on the
confirm Yes by pressing W. mobile phone.
If you select Yes
Yes, authorization is continued X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter
and the mobile phone is connected. the passkey first on the mobile phone and
If you select No
No, the process will be can- then in COMAND.
celed. X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on
X Confirm the message on the mobile phone. the mobile phone and in COMAND (Secure
Simple Pairing).
External authorization With both options, you see the prompt Do
you want <device name> to be
authorized? on the COMAND display.
X If you select Yes
Yes, the mobile phone will be
authorized. The messages Waiting for
a Connection to <name of B-tooth
dev.>… and Connecting Bluetooth
Profiles... are displayed. If the connec-
tion is successful, you see the telephone
basic menu and the connected mobile
phone is entered.
If you select No
If COMAND does not detect your mobile celed.
phone, this may be due to particular security
settings on your mobile phone. In this case, Switching between mobile phones
you can test if your mobile phone can find
COMAND. The Bluetooth® device name of If you have authorized more than one mobile
COMAND is "MB MB Bluetooth
Bluetooth". phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
Please note the following: some mobile
phones require that you establish the con-
Z
X Select the mobile phone in the Bluetooth® i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone,
telephone list by turning cVd the you should also delete the device name MB
COMAND controller and press W to con- Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Blue-
firm. tooth® list.
The selected mobile phone is searched for
and connected if it is within Bluetooth®
range and if Bluetooth® is activated. Displaying connection details
Only one mobile phone can be connected X Press the % function button on
at any one time. The currently connected COMAND.
mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in X Select Connect Dev: from the telephone
the Bluetooth® telephones list. basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning
i You can only switch to another authorized c V d the COMAND controller and press
Telephone
mobile phone if you are not currently mak- W to confirm.

ing a call. The Bluetooth® telephone list appears.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
De-authorizing (de-registering) a mobile Bluetooth® telephones list.
phone X Select the list symbol to the right of the
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de- entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
authorization in COMAND and on the mobile ler and press W to confirm.
phone. Subsequent authorization may other- X Select Details and press W to confirm.
wise fail. The following information concerning the
X Press the % function button on selected mobile phone is shown:
COMAND. RBluetooth® name
X Select Connect Dev. from the telephone RBluetooth® address
basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning Ravailability status (shown after a new
c V d the COMAND controller and press search)
W to confirm. Rauthorization status
The Bluetooth® telephone list appears
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
(Y page 127).
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth® telephones list.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to de-authorize this device.
X Select Yes or No
No.
If you select Yes
Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth® telephones list.
If you select No
celed.
Reception and transmission volume 131
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® Bluetooth® phone must have been com-
interface) pleted. The menu item is otherwise grayed
out. Further information on text messages
Basic menu display (Y page 144).
If you have an unread text message, the 1
mail symbol is displayed. The symbol disap-
pears once you have read the text message.
The ú mail symbol is displayed as soon as
the text message memory is full. The symbol
disappears once you delete at least one text
message.
Telephone
Reception and transmission volume
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface) Once the mobile phone has been authorized,
: Telephone status you can optimize the transmission and recep-
; Signal strength of mobile phone network tion volume settings. Find out more about the
Ä optimum settings for your mobile phone
= Receiver icon ¢ or ¡ online at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com.
? To display call lists
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
A Character bar (1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Rela-
B Bluetooth® name of the currently con- tions at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).
nected mobile phone
C To display the COMAND phone book
XPress the % function button.
When the connected mobile phone is ready
for use, the telephone basic menu appears.
i Display ; may vary, depending on the
mobile phone connected.
Bars ; show the current signal strength of
the mobile phone network. If all bars are
filled, you have optimum reception.
If no bars are shown, reception is either X Press the % function button.
very poor or there is none at all. X Select Connect Dev. in the telephone
Receiver icon shows whether a call is basic menu by sliding V Æ and turning
active/being connected ¡ or not ¢. c V d the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Text message display in the telephone X Select an authorized mobile phone from
basic menu the list by turning cVd.
The Text Message menu item is only availa- X Select the list symbol to the right of the
ble if the Bluetooth® phone supports the MAP entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile). ler and press W to confirm.
The downloading of text messages from the
Z
132 Using the telephone
X Select Reception Volume or Transmis‐ If the phone number is not transferred or the
sion Volume and press W to confirm. "Hide data" function is activated, Unknown
X Select a volume setting by turning cVd the appears in the display.
COMAND controller. i You can also accept a call as described
X To close the setting scale: press W or above when another main function is
slide X V Y. switched on in COMAND. Once you have
accepted the call, the display switches to
i Incorrect settings may have an impact on the telephone display. After the call is fin-
the quality of calls. ished, you see the display of the previous
main application again.
The display does not switch to telephone
Using the telephone mode if you:
Telephone
Incoming call Rpressthe % back button next to the

COMAND controller and then
Accepting a call
Raccept the call using the 6 button on
the multifunction steering wheel
Rejecting a call
X To reject: select Reject by turning cVd
confirm.
or
X Press the ~ button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Example: incoming call
X To accept: confirm Accept by pressing
Making a call
W.
or Using the number keypad
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on X Call up the telephone basic menu
the multifunction steering wheel. (Y page 131).
i You can also accept the call by voice com- X Enter the digits using the number keypad.
mand using the Voice Control System (see
the separate operating instructions).
X To connect the call: press the 6 but-
ton on COMAND or on the multifunction
Once you have accepted the call, you can use
steering wheel.
hands-free mode.
The call volume can be adjusted (Y page 30).
Using the telephone basic menu
Other functions during a call (Y page 133)
If the phone number of the caller is transfer- X Call up the telephone basic menu
red, it appears in the display. (Y page 131).
If an entry for the caller exists in the phone X Select the digits one by one by turning
book, you will also see the name. cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND con-
Using the telephone 133
X To make a call: select ° in the character Option 2:

bar and press W to confirm. X Call up the telephone basic menu
or (Y page 131).
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on X Select Call Lists by sliding VÆ and turn-
the multifunction steering wheel. ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Redial A menu appears.
X Select Speed Dial Preset List by turn-
X Call up the telephone basic menu
(Y page 131). ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select ° in the character bar and press
The speed dial list appears.
W to confirm.
X Select preset and press W to confirm.
or
Telephone
The telephone basic menu displays the
X If the telephone basic menu is displayed,
selected entry. This initiates dialing.
press the 6 button on COMAND.
In both cases, the calls dialed list appears.
The most recently dialed number is at the Functions available during a call
top.
X To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND Overview
controller.
X To connect the call: press W the
COMAND controller.
Using the call list or COMAND phone

book
X Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 141).
or
X Call up the COMAND phone book and Telephone operation with a single call
select an entry (Y page 138). : Person you are calling
X To make a call: press W the COMAND ; Symbol for active telephone connection
controller or the 6 button. = To switch hands-free microphone on/off
(Y page 134)
Making a call via speed dial ? To send DTMF tones (not possible with all
The speed dial list contains stored entries mobile phones) (Y page 134)
from the phone book (Y page 143). A To end a call
Option 1: Available functions:
X Hold down one of the number keys for lon- RAccepting a waiting call (Y page 134)
ger than two seconds. RMaking a second call (Y page 135)
The telephone basic menu displays the RToggling (Y page 135)
selected entry. This initiates dialing.
Z
134 Using the telephone
Availability depends on the network (only pos- answering machine, select the desired
sible in the GSM network) and on the Blue- characters in the character bar, pressing
tooth® mobile phone. W to confirm each of them.
or
Switching the hands-free microphone X Press the corresponding key on the
on/off COMAND number keypad.
This function is also available during an active Every character selected will be transmit-
phone call. ted immediately.
X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF
(Y page 131). sequence: select Name by turning cVd the
X To switch off: select Mic Off and press firm.
W to confirm.
Telephone
X Select the desired phone book entry and

If the microphone is switched off, the dis-
press W to confirm.
play shows the Q icon, and the The
The entry is sent as a DTMF character
microphone is off. message appears string.
for a short period.
X To switch on: select Mic On and press X To return to the call display: select
W to confirm. Back and press W to confirm.
The Q symbol disappears. You will briefly i You can also send DTMF tones using the
see the The microphone is on. mes- Voice Control system; see the separate
sage. operating instructions.
Sending DTMF tones

Calls with several participants
Rejecting or accepting a waiting call
The mobile phone network provider must sup-
port and activate the call-waiting function.
Depending on the mobile phone used, the
system behavior differs when accepting a
call.
If you have a call in progress and receive
another call, a new window appears in the
display. You also hear a tone. You can accept
This function is not supported by all mobile or reject the call.
phones. X To reject: select Reject and press W to
Answering machines or other devices can be confirm.
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote or
query functions. X Press the ~ button on COMAND or on
X If you would like to listen to the messages the multifunction steering wheel.
on your answering machine, for example,
dial the corresponding number.
X To transmit individual characters: once
a connection has been established to the
Using the telephone 135
X To accept: select Accept and press W to

confirm.
or
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on
The system behavior after accepting the
incoming call depends on your mobile phone.
RThe mobile phone supports the call waiting
function (via Bluetooth®) when:
The previously active call is held. You can : Symbol for making a second call
then switch back and forth between both
calls (toggling) (Y page 135). X Select symbol : by turning cVd the
Telephone
RThe mobile phone does not support the call COMAND controller and press W to con-
waiting function (via Bluetooth®) when: firm.
The previously active call is ended. or
This is also the case if you accept the wait- X Press the 6 button on COMAND.
ing call using the Voice Control System (see X Enter the phone number:
the separate operating instructions). Rmanually (Y page 132)
The COMAND display changes. If you con- Rusing the phone book (Y page 138)
tinue to operate functions on the mobile
Rusing the call lists (Y page 141)
phone, the COMAND display may differ from
that of the mobile phone. Rusing speed dial (Y page 133)
Making a second call Call waiting and conference calls

If the following requirements are met, you can You can switch back and forth between two
make another call while on the phone with calls with the call waiting function. The func-
someone else: tion is available if your mobile phone supports
RThe function has to be supported by the the toggling function (via Bluetooth®).
mobile phone network. You can interconnect various callers to create
RThe mobile phone has to support the con- a conference call with the Conference func-
nection of a further call via Bluetooth®. This tion.
action puts the previous call on hold if the You can use the function if you are answering
mobile phone supports this function. a second call or making a second call while
RThe appropriate setting has to be activated talking to someone else.
on the mobile phone.
Z
136 Using the phone book
: Active call To call other participants:

; Call on hold X Select symbol : and press W to confirm.
Telephone
= To interconnect the call on hold and the You can now switch between the new par-
active call to create a conference call. ticipant and the conference call or add the
To switch between the active call and the call participant to the conference call.
on hold (call waiting):
X Select call on hold ; and press W to con-
firm.
or
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or on
The previous call on hold is activated.
X To end the active call: select ¢ in the
telephone basic menu and press W to con-
firm.
or Switching between a new participant and the
conference call:
the multifunction steering wheel. X Select Conference Call and press W to
The call on hold is activated. confirm.
You will change to a conference call. The
To interconnect the call on hold and the active
new participant is placed on hold.
call to create a conference call:
Adding a new participant to the conference
X Select Conference and press W to con-
call:
firm.
X Select Conference and press W to con-
firm.
Using the phone book

Introduction
The phone book displays the names and
phone numbers of all address book entries
saved in the COMAND address book. If an
Using the phone book 137
address book entry does not have a tele-

phone number, it does not appear in the
phone book.
The phone book of the mobile phone is auto-
matically downloaded to COMAND after con-
nection.
In the telephone book, you can:
Rsave phone numbers (Y page 139)
Rsearch for entries (Y page 138)
Rdelete entries (Y page 139)
Rimport contacts (Y page 152) i You can also call up the phone book using
Rdelete contacts (Y page 154) the multifunction steering wheel; see the
Telephone
Rreceive vCards (Y page 153)
separate vehicle Operator's Manual.
i The stored phone book and the vCards Closing the phone book
remain in COMAND even if you use
X Select the & symbol in the character bar
COMAND with another mobile phone. The
entries can be viewed without a mobile by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the
phone. For this reason, you should delete COMAND controller and press W to con-
any phone book entries before handing firm.
over or selling the vehicle. or
X Press the k button.
Calling up the phone book

Symbol overview
Opening the phone book
Sym- Explanation
X Press the % function button. bol
X Select Name in the telephone basic menu
Æ Address book entry that has been
entered or changed via COMAND
If the phone book contains entries, they will Imported contact that has been
be displayed in alphabetical order. The saved in the phone or address book
character bar at the bottom of the display \ Address book entry with voice tag
is active. These entries have also been
The character bar is used for fast selection assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are
of an entry. available in vehicles with the Voice
Enter the character using the character bar Control System (see the separate
(Y page 34). operating instructions).
Ã Contact that has been imported
from a mobile phone that supports
PBAP
Z
138 Using the phone book
Sym- Explanation Using the number keypad

bol You determine the first letter of the entry you
¯ are looking for with the first character you
Entry that has been imported from
enter.
the memory card or USB device
X Press the appropriate number keys as
® Entry imported via the Bluetooth® many times as necessary and one after the
interface other.
Further information on character entry using
the number keypad (direct entry)
Searching for a phone book entry (Y page 36).
Using the character bar
Directly from the list
Telephone
You determine the first letter of the entry you

are looking for with the first character you You can switch to the list at any time during
enter. character entry.
X Select a character by turning cVd the X Slide VZ the COMAND controller repeat-
COMAND controller and press W to con- edly or press and hold W until the charac-
firm. ter bar disappears.
The first entry in the list that starts with the or
letter selected is highlighted. If there are X Select ¬ and press W to confirm.
similar entries, the next different character
is shown. For example, with entries such as X To select an entry: turn cVd the
Christel and Christine
Christine, the beginnings COMAND controller until the desired entry
of the names are similar. In this case, you is highlighted and press W to confirm.
will be offered a choice between E and I. To select a phone number: the G symbol
X Select the characters of the entry you are indicates that an entry contains more than
searching for one by one and press W to one phone number.
confirm. X Select a phone book entry with the G sym-
When the selection is clear, COMAND bol and press W to confirm.
switches automatically to the selection list. The sub-entries appear. The G symbol
X To complete the search: slide VZ the changes to I.
COMAND controller repeatedly or press
and hold W until the character bar disap-
pears.
The selection list appears.
Information about character entry
(Y page 34)
Phone book entry with several entries

Using the phone book 139
X Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
press W to confirm. If you select Yes
Yes, the entry is deleted in
accordance with the rules described above.
X To return to the phone book using the
character bar: select & in the list and If you select No
press W to confirm. celed.
or
X Press the k button. Creating a new entry in the phone
book
Displaying details for an entry

X Select an entry in the selection list by turn-
ing cVd the COMAND controller.
Telephone
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The detailed view appears.
X To close the detailed display: slide
XVY repeatedly until the entry is high- X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeat-
lighted again. edly in the phone book until the selection
list appears.
or
X Select the list symbol on the right in the
X Press the k back button.
selection list by sliding VY the COMAND
X Select New Entry and press W to confirm.
Deleting an entry from the phone
book X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
Home
If the entry contains only phone numbers, it
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
is deleted from the phone book and address
book. Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Mobile
X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
If it contains additional data, such as a navi-
gable destination, the entry is deleted in the The input menu with data fields appears.
phone book. However, the entry is retained in
the address book.
A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
Z
140 Using call lists
will appear. You can then choose whether

to overwrite one of the existing numbers.
If you select Yes
Yes, a selection list will appear
containing the five existing numbers.
If you select No
celed.
X Select the number to be overwritten by
press W to confirm.
: Selected data field with cursor An input menu appears. The data field for
; Character bar entering the new phone number is high-
Telephone
X Enter characters (Y page 34) lighted.

X To save an entry: select the ¬ symbol X Enter characters (Y page 34)
in the character bar by turning cVd the X Store the entry (Y page 35)
firm.
The entry is created in the phone book and Using call lists
in the address book.
Introduction
While the telephone is being used, COMAND
Adding to a phone book entry stores individual lists for both incoming and
You can add telephone numbers to an exist- outgoing calls (including missed calls). Call
ing phone book entry. lists are not available unless a mobile phone
is connected to COMAND.
COMAND supports the PBAP Bluetooth® pro-
file. How COMAND processes call lists
depends on the model of the mobile phone
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- connected:
RBluetooth® telephone with PBAP Blue-
X Select Add Phone No. and press W to
tooth® profile:
confirm.
The call lists are downloaded automatically
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
from the mobile phone by COMAND as
Home soon as the mobile phone is connected to
X Select a category for the phone, e.g. COMAND.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Mobile RBluetooth® telephone without PBAP Blue-
X Select Continue and press W to confirm. tooth® profile:
COMAND stores the data if there are fewer COMAND creates the call lists from both
than five numbers assigned to the entry you incoming and outgoing calls (including
are searching for in the selected number missed calls) as soon as the mobile phone
category. is connected to COMAND.
If five numbers are stored for the entry in
the selected number category, a prompt i For Bluetooth® telephones without the
PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the call lists in
COMAND are not synchronized with those
Using call lists 141
on your mobile phone. These calls may or Displaying details from a list entry
may not be listed on your mobile phone,
depending on the model. COMAND can also show a shortened list entry
in full.
i If no mobile phone is connected, then the X Select a list entry by turning cVd the
Call Lists menu item is grayed out and
COMAND controller.
cannot be selected. If you connect a mobile
phone other than the previous one to
COMAND, the previously available call lists entry by sliding VY the controller and
and their entries will be deleted automati- press W to confirm.
cally. They are still available on the mobile X Select Details and press W to confirm.
phone itself. The detailed view appears.
i You will only be able to select the respec- X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeat-
edly until the list is highlighted.
Telephone
tive menu items once calls have been
received or dialed from COMAND.
Displaying missed calls in the COMAND
display is not supported by all mobile Storing a phone number
phones.
New address book entry
For incoming calls from a person who is not
Opening the call list and selecting an in the address book, COMAND displays the
entry phone number in the call list. You can save
this entry.
X Press the % function button.
X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic
(Y page 141).
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
firm.
A menu appears. ler and press W to confirm.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
X Select Calls Received or Calls
Dialed by turning cVd and press W to
confirm. X Select a category for the number, e.g.
The corresponding list appears. Home, and press W to confirm.
Home
i You can also call up the list of dialed calls X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
by pressing the 6 button when the tele- Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Mobile
phone basic menu is shown. In this case,
Number category Display (phone
the list will only show phone numbers.
book and address
X Select an entry by turning cVd the book)
COMAND controller.
Not Classified No symbol
X To dial a phone number: press W.
Home ¸
X To close the list: select the & symbol
and press W to confirm. Work ·
or
Z
142 Using call lists
Telephone cate- Display (phone i Save is shown in gray if the selected list
gory book and address entry has already been saved.
book) X Select Add Phone No. and press W to
; confirm.
Not Classified
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Mobile Ï
Home
Car ´ X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Mobile
Pager ¨
X Select Save
Save.
The search menu for address book entries
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
appears.
An input menu with data fields is shown.
X Search for the desired entry (Y page 138).
Telephone
The data field for the telephone number is

filled in automatically. X Press W when you have finished searching.
COMAND stores the data if there are fewer
than five numbers assigned to the entry you
are searching for in the selected number
category.
You will see a message to this effect.
If five numbers are stored for the entry you
are searching for, a prompt will appear ask-
ing whether you wish to overwrite one of
the existing numbers.
If you select Yes
Yes, a selection list with the
: Data field with cursor
five existing numbers is displayed.
; Telephone number and symbol for the
If you select No
phone category (automatically entered)
celed.
= Character bar
X Select the number to be overwritten in the
list by turning cVd the COMAND controller
Adding information to an address book and press W to confirm.
entry
COMAND overwrites the selected number
For incoming calls from a person who is not with the new data.
in the address book, COMAND displays the
phone number in the call list. You can save
this entry. Deleting call lists
If you are using a Bluetooth® phone that does
(Y page 141).
not support the PBAP Bluetooth® profile, the
call lists are generated and managed by
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- COMAND. You can delete these call lists in
ler and press W to confirm. COMAND.
X Select Save and press W to confirm. If you download call lists from a Bluetooth®
phone that supports the PBAP Bluetooth®
Using the speed dial list 143
profile, you cannot delete them from

COMAND.
X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic
X Select Delete Call Lists and press W
to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete all call lists.
If you select Yes
Yes, the call lists are deleted. Speed dial menu
If you select No
No, the process will be can- X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset and
Telephone
celed. press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears. The selected
i If you delete these call lists from the phone book entry is listed as the first entry.
mobile phone (see the separate mobile The next available speed dial preset is high-
phone operating instructions), COMAND lighted.
updates the call list display the next time it
connects.
Using the speed dial list

Storing an entry
You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 – 9)
to the speed dial list. There are two options
available for this purpose.
Option 1:
X Search for a phone book entry in the phone X Select the speed dial preset by turning
book (Y page 138). cVd the COMAND controller and press
X If an entry has several phone numbers, W to confirm.
select the desired number by turning The phone book entry is saved in the speed
cVd the COMAND controller. dial preset.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the Option 2:
(Y page 131).
A menu appears.
X Select Call Lists by sliding VÆ and turn-
X Select Speed Dial by turning cVd the
W to confirm.
firm.
X Select Speed Dial Preset List and
A menu appears.
press W to confirm.
Z
144 Text messages
X Select the list symbol to the right of the X Select Speed Dial Preset List by turn-
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
ler and press W to confirm. W to confirm.
X Select Assign Speed Dial Preset and The speed dial list appears.
press W to confirm. X Select preset and press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears. The selected The telephone basic menu displays the
phone book entry is listed as the first entry. selected entry. This initiates dialing.
The next available speed dial preset is high-
lighted.
Deleting a speed dial number
X To delete a speed dial number: select
Delete Speed Dial Preset in the
Telephone
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the

firm.
The speed dial number is deleted.
X To delete all speed dial numbers: select
Delete All Speed Dial Presets in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the
X Select the speed dial preset by turning COMAND controller and press W to con-
cVd the COMAND controller and press firm.
W to confirm. You will be asked whether you want to con-
The phone book entry is saved in the speed tinue.
dial preset. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes
Yes, all speed dial presets will
be deleted from the speed dial list.
Making a call via speed dial If you select No
The speed dial list contains stored phone celed.
book entries (Y page 143).
Option 1:
Text messages
X Hold down one of the number keys for lon-
ger than two seconds. Information and requirements
The telephone basic menu displays the In order to be able to use the text message
selected entry. This initiates dialing. function, the mobile phone has to support the
Option 2: MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access
Profile).
(Y page 131). If the above conditions are met, new incoming
X Select Call Lists by sliding VÆ and turn-
text messages appear in the COMAND text
message inbox. The / symbol appears in
the status bar. The symbol disappears once
W to confirm.
you have read the text message. The ú
mail symbol is displayed if the text message
memory is full. The symbol is no longer dis-
Text messages 145
played once you delete at least one text mes- X To scroll through the display or select
sage. phone numbers in a text message: turn
i COMAND may not load all of the most cVd the COMAND controller.
recent text messages: The display scrolls up or down line by line,
or skips to the next or previous telephone
This may occur in exceptional cases, for number and automatically highlights it.
example when using certain mobile
X To return to the list: press W and select
phones/brackets and if the mobile phone
inbox holds a large number of text mes- Back.
Back
sages.
Text message read-aloud function
Settings for the read-aloud function:
Displaying the text message inbox
RLanguage (Y page 45)
Telephone
Calling up the inbox RSpeed (Y page 44)
X Press W while a text message is being dis-
played, select Read Aloud and press W to
confirm.
COMAND reads out the text message.
X To cancel the read-aloud function: press
the 8 button.
or
X Press W, select Cancel Read-Aloud
Function and press W to confirm.
Text message inbox
Sender or text display
X Press the % function button.
X Select Txt Msg. in the telephone basic You can switch between displaying the text
menu by turning cVd the COMAND con- message sender or the text message content.
troller and press W to confirm. The sender display shows the sender of the
The text message inbox appears. text message. If the sender is stored in the
COMAND phone book, the name is displayed.
The text display shows the first few words of
Reading a text message
the text message.
X Call up the text message (SMS) inbox X Select a text message in the text message
(Y page 145) inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-
X Select a text message in the text message troller.
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con- X To switch to the text display: select the
troller and press W to confirm. list symbol to the right of the text message
The text message appears. by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Display Text and press W to con-
firm.
The view changes.
Z
146 Text messages
X To switch to the sender display: select Using phone numbers in the text
the list symbol to the right of the text mes-
sage by sliding VY the COMAND controller
X Select Display Sender and press W to
confirm.
The view changes.
X To return to the telephone basic menu:
press the k button.
Displaying details and phone numbers

: Usable numerical sequence
COMAND can also show a shortened sender
Telephone
display in full. Numbers in text messages that are high-

X Select a text message in the text message lighted in red can be used.
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con- X Select a usable number when the text mes-
troller. sage is displayed.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text X Press W the COMAND controller and
message by sliding VY the COMAND con- select Use
Use.
troller and press W to confirm. X Select Call
Call.
X Select Details and press W to confirm. The phone makes the call.
i It is possible that a highlighted numerical
X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the
sequence may not contain a telephone
COMAND controller.
number.
X To return to the telephone basic menu:
i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no."
press the k button.
functions to save this telephone number or
to add it to an existing entry.
Managing text messages Storing the sender of a text message in
Calling a text message sender the address book
X Press W the COMAND controller while the This function is not available if the sender’s
text message is being displayed. telephone number is already stored in the
address book.
X Select Call Sender and press W to con-
X Press W the COMAND controller while the
firm.
The telephone makes the call to the sender. text message is being displayed.
X Select Save Number and press W to con-
firm.
X Store the phone number (Y page 141)
Using the address book 147
Adding the sender of a text message to ces (mobile phone, memory card, USB device,
an address book entry COMAND phone book, navigation system).
X Press W the COMAND controller while the You can use these entries to make telephone
text message is being displayed. calls and for navigation.
X Select Save Number and press W to con- i Number of contacts in the address
firm. book: the address book can store a total of
X Select Add Phone No. and press W to 4000 contacts.
confirm. 1500 entries each are reserved in the
X Proceed from the step "Select a number
address book for:
category" (Y page 140). Rcontacts from the mobile phone
Rcontacts that you create in COMAND or
Deleting a text message import from other sources
Telephone
The remaining 1,000 entries are assigned
X Select a text message in the text message
by COMAND as necessary.
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND con-
troller. i Display of mobile phone contacts: con-
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text tacts downloaded from the mobile phone
message by sliding VY the COMAND con- remain in the address book even if you dis-
troller and press W to confirm. connect the mobile phone from COMAND.
Contacts that have previously been availa-
ble can be displayed as soon as the mobile
A deletion prompt appears. phone is reconnected. COMAND down-
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. loads the contacts again so that any new
If you select Yes
Yes, the text message is contacts that have been added to the
deleted. mobile phone can be displayed.
If you select No
No, the process will be can- As soon as you connect a new mobile
celed. phone to COMAND all the contacts from
the previous mobile phone are replaced by
i This delete function is not supported by
those from the new phone's address book.
all mobile phones. The Delete failed
message appears. Address book entries remain stored when
the mobile phone is disconnected. For this
reason, delete your personal data using the
Using the address book reset function before selling your vehicle,
for example (Y page 47).
Introduction
Always pay attention to traffic conditions.
Calling up the address book
Before starting the journey, familiarize your-
self with the address book functions. Using the function button:
Only use COMAND when the road and traffic X Press the % function button.
conditions permit. You could otherwise You see either the telephone basic menu or
become involved in an accident in which you the address book, depending on which was
or others could be injured. last active.
The address book organizes and stores X If the telephone basic menu is displayed,
entries that are entered from different sour- press the % function button again.
Z
148 Using the address book
Using the telephone basic menu: Searching for an address book entry
X When the telephone basic menu is dis-
played select Phone by sliding VZ the
COMAND Controller and press W to con-
firm.
X Select Address Book from the menu and
press W to confirm.
Search menu with character bar

Telephone
: ¥ Address book entry

; L Complete address data from the nav-
igation system
= Character bar
? d Phone book entry on the mobile phone
Address book with address book entry ¥ and nav- A Entry with voice tag
igable data L
For more symbols, see the symbol overview
X To browse in the address book: turn
(Y page 137)
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Find entry (Y page 138)
X To close the address book: press the
% button.
i An address book entry can contain the Creating a new entry in the address
following information: book
Rname You can enter address data directly into the
Rfirst name address book. If you store telephone num-
Rcompany bers in the COMAND phone book, these are
also saved in the address book. If you store a
Rtwo addresses navigation destination, COMAND creates an
Rgeo-coordinates
address book entry which includes the com-
Rup to five telephone numbers plete navigable address data.
X Calls up the address book (Y page 147)
X Select New in the address book by sliding

VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-
An input menu with data fields appears.
Displaying the detailed view for an

address book entry
Selecting an entry
Input menu with data fields

: Selected data field with cursor
Telephone
; Character bar
X Enter characters (Y page 34)
Detailed display of address book
X Store the entry (Y page 35)
: To return to the previous menu
; \ Business details
Deleting an address book entry = List symbol (to call up options)
X Option 1: select Delete by sliding VÆ and X Searching for an address book entry
turning cVd the COMAND controller and (Y page 138)
press W to confirm. X Make a selection in the selection list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Option 2: search for an address book entry
or
(Y page 138).
X Call up the address book (Y page 147)
ler and press W to confirm. COMAND controller.
Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt The detailed view appears.
will appear.
Starting route guidance to an address
If you select Yes
Yes, the entry will be deleted. X Select the address data field by turning
If you select No
No, the process will be can- cVd the COMAND controller and press
celed. W to confirm.
The route to the destination address is cal-
culated and route guidance starts
(Y page 69).
Calling a telephone number

X Select the phone number data field by turn-
W to confirm.
This initiates dialing and you can then make
your call (Y page 133).
Z
Showing the details of an address book Changing the category of a telephone

entry number data field
X Select the list symbol to the right of the X Display details for an address book entry
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- (Y page 149).
ler and press W to confirm. X Select the telephone number data field.
X Select Details and press W to confirm. X Select the list symbol to the right of the
The display is shown in full. entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
X To close the detailed display: press the ler and press W to confirm.
% back button. X Select Change Category and press W to
confirm.
X Select a number category, e.g. Home
Home.
Changing an address book entry
X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Mobile.
Telephone
X Option 1: search for an address book entry

X If desired, select Preferred and press W
(Y page 138).
to confirm.
X Make a selection in the selection list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller.
the option on O or off ª. The phone num-
ber is displayed as the first number in the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- phone book and can be dialed immediately.
ler and press W to confirm. X Select Save and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
The new category is stored.
Calling a number stored in an entry

Prerequisites
The mobile phone must be connected via the
Bluetooth® Interface (Y page 126).
Dialing a number
X Display details for an address book entry
X Select Edit and press W to confirm. (Y page 149).
X Option 2: call up the detailed view for an
address book entry (Y page 149). ing cVd the COMAND controller.
X Press W the COMAND controller to con-
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- firm.
ler and press W to confirm. or
X Select Edit and press W to confirm. X Select the list symbol to the right of the
Irrespective of the option chosen, the input data field by sliding VY the COMAND con-
menu containing data fields appears. troller.
Information about character entry
(Y page 34)
X Press W the COMAND controller to con- Address book entry without navigable
firm. data
X Select Call and press W to confirm.
Route guidance can also be started for an
The phone makes the call. The display address book entry without the L symbol. If
switches to telephone mode. the address data or designations do not
match the digital map, COMAND prompts you
to re-enter the address.
Storing the phone number as a speed X Enter the destination address (Y page 63)
dial number
X Start route guidance.
X Display details for an address book entry The navigable address is automatically
(Y page 149). added to the address book entry.
i This will provide you with an address book
Telephone
entry that is suitable for navigation. The
next time the navigation is started, the
data field by sliding VY the COMAND con- address data in the navigation, rather than
troller and press W to confirm. the postal address, is used if you have
X Select Speed Dial and press W to con- changed address in the address entry
firm. menu. Therefore, make sure that the des-
You can now store the number in one of the tination address is the desired destination
ten speed dial presets (Y page 143). when starting navigation from the address
book.
Starting route guidance to an entry

Voice tags
Address book entry with navigable data
Introduction
This function is available as soon as you have
stored a destination in the destination mem- You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control
ory (Y page 105). System (see the separate operating instruc-
tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to
X Search for an address book entry with the
an address book entry, you can call up this
L symbol and select it from the list
entry with a voice command and dial a phone
(Y page 148). number, for example. You can add one voice
X Display details for an address book entry tag per address book entry.
(Y page 149).
X Select the address data field by turning Adding or changing a voice tag
cVd the COMAND controller and press X Search for an address book entry with or
W to confirm. without a voice tag (¦) (Y page 148).
Route guidance begins. X Select the list symbol to the right of the
or entry by sliding VY the COMAND control-
X Select the list symbol to the right of the ler and press W to confirm.
X Select Navigate and press W to confirm.
Route guidance begins.
Z
X Select Voice Name and press W to con- The following can be used as a source:
firm. Rthe mobile phone
X Select Add or Change and press W to con- Rthe memory card
firm. Rthe USB device
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
Rthe Bluetooth® Interface
The Voice Control System guides you
through the dialogs. Imported phone book entries are indicated in
the phone book by different symbols
(Y page 137).
Deleting a voice tag
X Search for an entry in the phone book on
X Search for an address book entry with a the mobile phone d (Y page 138).
voice tag (Y page 148).
Telephone

X Select Save Entry and press W to con-
X Select Voice Name and press W to con-
firm.
firm. The Data Saved message appears. The
X Select Delete and press W to confirm. phone book entry is now saved as an
A deletion prompt appears. address book entry.
X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button The d symbol is replaced by the ¥ sym-
to confirm. bol.
If you select Yes
Yes, COMAND deletes the
voice tag.
If you select No
No, the process will be can- Importing contacts
celed.
Information and requirements
Listening to a voice tag You can import contacts (vCards) from the
memory card and a USB device into the
X Search for an address book entry with a address book, or receive vCards via Blue-
voice tag (Y page 148).
tooth®.
entry by sliding VY the COMAND control- i Up to 2500 entries can be imported into
ler and press W to confirm. the address book. A message notifies you
when the maximum number is reached.
X Select Voice Name and press W to con-
You then have to delete existing entries in
firm. order to import new entries (Y page 149).
X Select Listen and press W to confirm.
Depending on the source of the contact data,
You hear the voice tag.
different requirements apply:
Importing phone book entries

This function allows you to store phone book
entries from the mobile phone in the address
book.
Source Prerequisites select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turn-

Memory card The SD memory card is W to confirm.
inserted (Y page 191). It
contains importable con- X Select Import Contacts and press W to
tact details. confirm.
A menu appears.
USB device The USB device is inserted
into the USB port X Select From the Memory Card or From
(Y page 191). It contains USB Device in the menu by turning cVd
importable contact details. the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Requirements for receiving vCards via XSelect Add or Overwrite and press W to
Bluetooth® confirm.
Telephone
You can receive vCards from devices (e.g. Add imports the entries from the memory
from a PC) that support the sending of vCards card or USB device into the address book.
via Bluetooth®. Overwrite imports the entries from the
It is not necessary to authorize the device in memory card or USB device and overwrites
COMAND to do so. all entries in the address book with the
Please bear the following in mind: ¯ symbol. The previous entries are then
no longer available.
RBluetooth® must be activated in COMAND After the contact data has been imported
and on the Bluetooth® device, see the oper- successfully, you will see a message to this
ating instructions for the device. effect. The address book or the respective
Rthe Bluetooth® device must be able to send telephone basic menu is displayed.
vCards via Bluetooth® (see operating i You can select Overwrite if the address
instructions for the device). book already contains corresponding
Rthe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle must entries. A message notifies you when the
be switched on. address book is full.
Importing from the memory card or USB Receiving vCards via Bluetooth®
device
Entries imported from the memory card or
from a USB device have the ¯ symbol.
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to import vCards:
RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
directory or in folders. COMAND allows you
to select the relevant folders directly.
RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".
i One vcf file may contain several vCards.

X Select Address Book in the address book
COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
and 3.0.
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turn-
X Select Address Book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
Z
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press RReceived Business Cards
W to confirm. RDelete All
A menu appears. A prompt corresponding to your selection
X Select Import Contacts and press W to appears.
confirm. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
X Select Receive Contacts From Phone in If you select Yes
Yes, the contacts are deleted
the menu by turning cVd the COMAND according to your selection.
controller and press W to confirm. If you select No
This interrupts the Bluetooth® connection celed.
between COMAND and your active mobile
phone. COMAND is, however, ready to Switching importing of contacts on/off
receive vCards from another Bluetooth®
device (PC, mobile phone).
Telephone
X Start the data transfer on the external Blue-

tooth® device (see the operating instruc-
tions for the device).
The number of vCards received is dis-
played.
X To end reception: press W or the %
back button.
COMAND then reconnects to the mobile
phone.
You can choose whether contacts are auto-
Received vCards are identified by the ® matically downloaded when a mobile phone
symbol in the address book. is connected to COMAND, or whether the
i If you switch to another main function, automatic download is suppressed.
e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 126)
reception of vCards will be terminated. X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
Deleting contacts controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Address Book in the address book A menu appears.
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown, X Select Import Contacts from <my
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turn- phone> and press W to confirm.

ing cVd the COMAND controller and press You can allow O or suppress ª the auto-
W to confirm. matic download.
A menu appears.
X Select Delete Contacts and press W to
confirm.
X Select one of the following options:
RInternal Contacts
RContacts From Storage Devices
Proceed as follows if you do not want to save the phone number or have access to the
sensitive contacts in the address book: message.
X Connect the mobile phone to COMAND.
Contacts are automatically downloaded to
the address book.
X Delete sensitive contacts in the address
book.
X Switch off the Import Contacts from
<my phone> function ª.
The next time you connect your mobile
phone to COMAND, no more contacts will
be downloaded, not even newly-added con-
tacts.
Telephone
Connecting a mobile phone (Y page 126)
X Select Tel in the telephone basic menu by
Switching the display of contact details
(privacy) on/off
Using the Hide Data setting, you can decide A menu appears.
whether the phone and address book data are
to be visible on the screen. You can therefore,
X To hide details: select Hide <My Phone>
for example, prevent a passenger from seeing Data and press W to confirm.
the name of a caller. You can allow access to address data ª or
you can prevent access O.
Activating the function has the following
effects:
RThe mobile phone's phone book and
address book data are hidden. They can
therefore not be used to make calls, send
text messages or to navigate.
You still have access to the phone book and
address book stored on COMAND.
RDuring incoming calls, the caller's name is
not displayed if there is an address book
entry for the number that is calling.
RDuring outgoing calls where the number is
entered manually, the recipient's name is
not displayed, even if there is an address
book entry for the entered number.
RThe call list is hidden.
RRedialing is not possible.
RThe received text messages list is hidden.
There is still a notification for incoming text
messages. For this to be the case, the con-
nected mobile phone must support the
MAP profile. However, it is not possible
that, for example, the passenger could see
Z
156
157

General notes .................................... 158
Establishing/ending the connec-
tion ..................................................... 158
Google™ local search ....................... 159
Destination/route download ........... 162
Options .............................................. 164
Other services ................................... 166
Internet radio .................................... 167
Internet .............................................. 168

158 Establishing/ending the connection
Your COMAND equipment Establishing/ending the connection
These operating instructions describe all the Establishing the connection

standard and optional equipment for your Preconditions for establishing a connection
COMAND system, as available at the time of can be found under "General notes"
going to print. Country-specific differences (Y page 158).
are possible. Please note that your X Option 1: select the ® icon in the main
function bar by turning cVd the COMAND
The carousel view appears.
General notes X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con-
troller until the Mercedes-Benz Apps
Conditions for access panel or a favorite is brought to the front, if
To use COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and these have been previously created
Internet access, the following conditions (Y page 173).
must be fulfilled: X Option 2: enter a web address

Rmbrace is activated and operational (Y page 168).
Rmbrace is activated for COMAND
Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access
Priority of connections: an emergency call
has the highest priority. When a service call,
e.g. a breakdown service call or the MB Info
Call, is active, an emergency call can still be
initiated.
A service call, on the other hand, has priority
over a current Internet connection. Therefore,
you cannot establish an Internet connection
during a service call.
i The availability of individual COMAND
Mercedes-Benz Apps may vary depending
on the country.
i The terms of use are shown when
COMAND is used for the first time and then
once a year thereafter. Only read and
accept the terms of use when the vehicle
is stationary.
i Internet pages cannot be shown on the
driver's side while the vehicle is in motion. X For both options, press W the COMAND
controller.
The Internet connection is established. An
active Internet connection is identified with
symbol :. The example shows the menu
Google™ local search 159
in the Google™ Local Search X Confirm the Google Local Search entry
(Y page 159) function. by pressing W.
X To cancel the connection: while the con- The Google Local Search menu appears.
nection is being established, confirm Can‐ X To exit the menu: select Back by sliding
cel by pressing W. VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-

or troller and press W to confirm.
Search
Entry restriction
Ending the connection
It is only possible to enter a search term in
You cannot cancel the connection yourself. the input menu when the vehicle is stationary.
The Internet connection is automatically ter-
minated if the system does not recognize any Entering a search term

user input within a five-minute time period.
i The ~ button is inoperative.
Google™ local search

Calling up the local search menu
Input menu
X Confirm Search in the Google Local Search
menu by pressing W.
The input menu appears.
X To enter using the character bar: enter
the search term.
X To enter characters using the number
X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by turning c V d the COMAND controller pad: press the number keys in rapid suc-
and press W to confirm. cession.
The character appears when the key is
A list with active Mercedes-Benz Apps
pressed. The first available character is
appears.
highlighted.
X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Apps panel to
the front by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
The Mercedes-Benz Apps menu is dis-
played.
160 Google™ local search
X After entering the search term, select Example: search results

¬ by turning cVd the COMAND con-
troller and press W to confirm. Using search results
A menu appears. Here, you can select
where the destination search should begin.
Selecting the search position
X Select an entry in the list of search results

A menu appears.
X After a search term has been entered and X To show the detailed view: confirm
confirmed, a menu appears. Details by pressing W the COMAND con-
COMAND searches for available POIs for troller.
the search term entered: The address of the selected entry is dis-
Rnear the current vehicle position played.
Ralong the calculated route XTo use a search result as the destina-
If a destination has previously been tion: select Navigate to by turning cVd
entered, the function is available. the COMAND controller and press W to
Rnear the destination confirm.
If a destination has previously been You then switch to navigation mode and
entered, the function is available. can start route calculation (Y page 69).
Rnear an address You then switch to navigation mode and
X After selecting Near Destination,
Destination enter can start route calculation.
an address and confirm. i The search result is stored in the
The search results are displayed. "Last destinations" memory at the same
time (Y page 107). You can take the desti-
nation from this memory and save it per-
Google™ local search 161
manently in the destination memory Popular searches

(Y page 105).
X To call up a destination: select Call with
confirm.
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call (Y page 132).
and make the call.
i If there is no phone number available, the
menu item cannot be selected.
X To import a destination: select Import
This function allows you to search using pre-
with the COMAND controller and press W
defined search criteria.
to confirm.
X Bring Popular Searches in the local
You can choose whether you want to save

the POI as a personal POI on the SD mem- search menu to the front by turning cVd
ory card or in the address book. (the COMAND controller and press W to
i If there is no SD memory card in the slot, confirm.
the Save As Personal POI menu item A menu displays the available search crite-
cannot be selected. ria.
X To save as a personal POI: confirm Save

As Personal POI by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The entry is saved as a personal POI on the
SD memory card.
i You can use a personal POI in navigation
mode for route calculation (Y page 85).
If the personal POI is saved on the SD mem-
ory, you can also use it for route calculation
in another vehicle. Example: popular searches
X To save to the address book: select

X Select the search criteria and press W to
Save to Address Book by turning cVd confirm.
the COMAND controller and press W to X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
confirm. search position" section (Y page 160). If

The entry is stored in the address book. the vehicle is stationary, the search results
can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel
Adler".
162 Destination/route download
Search History tinations and routes for route guidance and

save them for further use.
In order to use the download destination/
route function, the mbrace system must be:
Ractivated
Rset up
Rand activated for COMAND and Internet
access services.
For information on the mbrace system, see
the separate vehicle Operator's Manual.
This function offers you the previous search

Sending destinations to the server
queries.
X Bring Search History in the Local search X Call up the website for Google™ Maps on
menu to the front by turning cVd the the Internet.

COMAND controller and press W to con- X Enter a destination.
firm. X Click "More" at the destination.

The previous search queries are shown X Click "Send".
with the most recent at the top. X Click "Send to vehicle".
X Select Mercedes-Benz as the vehicle
brand.
X Enter the mbrace e-mail address or the
vehicle identification number.
X Enter the vehicle identification number.
X Click "Send".
The destination is sent to the server.
i The availability of the destination/route
download function is country-dependent.
X Select the search criteria and press W to

confirm. Downloading destinations from the
server
X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
search position" section (Y page 160). If Proceed as follows to use destinations/
the vehicle is stationary, the search results routes that have been sent to the server:
can be supplemented manually, e.g. "Hotel X Select the ® symbol in the main function
Adler". bar by turning cVd the COMAND control-
Destination/route download
Introduction the front by turning cVd the COMAND
You can send destinations and routes from
Google™ maps to the server and download
played.
these via this function. You can use the des-
Destination/route download 163
XTo call up a POI: confirm the entry by

pressing W.
i You can use the function if:
Ra mobile phone is connected
(Y page 126)
Rthe destination address contains a tele-
phone number
Using as the destination

XSelect Navigate to in the menu by turning
X Bring the Dest./Route Download panel to
the front and press W to confirm.
W to confirm.
i With Exit
Exit, you quit the destination/route You then switch to navigation mode and
download. can start route calculation (Y page 69).
With Options
Options, you set the options for the

i A route can only be stored as a personal
destination/route download POI on an SD memory card or taken directly
(Y page 165). for route calculation (Y page 163).
X Confirm the Dest./Route Download
panel by pressing W. Calling up the destination
Available routes and destinations are
shown in the list. X Select Call in the menu by turning cVd
You can save up to 20 routes and 50 desti-
confirm.
nations for your vehicle on the server and dis-
play these in the list. If you send further routes
and make the call (Y page 132).
or destinations to the server, the existing
entries are deleted from the list.
Importing a destination/route
i The routes/destinations sent from Goo-
gle™ maps to the server are automatically When importing, you can choose whether you
deleted from there after seven days. want to save the destination as a personal POI
on an SD memory card or in the address book.
You can only save routes as personal POIs to
Using destinations an SD memory card, but not in the address
book.
Calling up the menu X Select Import in the menu with the
X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd COMAND controller and press W to con-
the COMAND controller and press W to firm.
confirm. i If there is no SD memory card in the slot,
A menu appears. the As Personal POI menu item is grayed
out.
Displaying details X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 191).
X Confirm Details in the menu by pressing

The route or destination is displayed.
164 Options
X To save as a personal POI: confirm As Calling up the options menu

Personal POI by pressing W the
X Select the ® symbol in the main function
COMAND controller.
The entry is saved as a personal POI on the bar by turning c V d the COMAND con-
SD memory card. troller and press W to confirm.
i You can use a personal POI in navigation
mode for route calculation (Y page 85).
You can also use a personal POI in another
vehicle for route calculation. controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning
X To save to the address book: select To
Address Book by turning cVd the cVd the COMAND controller and press
COMAND controller and press W to con- W to confirm.
firm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
Selecting options for the local search
Deleting a destination/route from the Setting the search radius

server
confirm.
A query appears asking whether the desti-
nation or the route should be deleted.
Options
Introduction
You can select options for the following
Mercedes-Benz Apps on COMAND:
RLocal Search (Y page 164)
RDestination download (Y page 165)
You can reset the selected options to the
default settings (Y page 166).
X Select Local Search in the Options menu

The menu shows the current settings.
Options 165
X Confirm the entry after Search radius: Deleting/saving searches

by pressing W.
X Select the Delete all searches entry by
The # dot indicates the currently selected
search radius. press W to confirm.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the A prompt appears, asking whether you
COMAND controller and press W to con- really wish to delete the search.
firm. X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
The selected setting is accepted.
X To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press Setting options for destination/route
W to confirm. download
Setting the type of import
Selecting a service provider
You can choose between manual and auto-

matic importing.
X Select the entry after Import: by turning
W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select Manual or Automatic and press
W to confirm.
The setting is accepted.
X To exit the menu: select Back by turning
X Select Local Search in the Options menu cVd the COMAND controller and press
by turning cVd the COMAND controller W to confirm.
The menu shows the current settings. Deleting/saving POIs after they have
X Select the entry after Service pro‐ been imported to the server
vider: by turning cVd the COMAND con- X Select the entry after Import & Delete:
troller and press W to confirm. by turning cVd the COMAND controller
The # dot indicates the currently selected and press W to confirm.
service provider. The # dot indicates the current setting.
i If the entry is grayed out, you cannot X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
select the service provider. The setting is accepted.
X Select an entry and press W to confirm. Yes deletes the POIs after importing to the
The selected service provider is accepted. server.
X To exit the menu: select Back by turning No does not delete the POIs on the server.
cVd the COMAND controller and press X To exit the menu: select Back by turning
W to confirm. cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
166 Other services
i Routes and destinations are automati- Other services

cally deleted on the server after seven
days. Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website
Conditions of use
You can review the terms of use for the
COMAND Mercedes-Benz Apps and Goo-
gle™.
X Select Terms and Conditions in the
options menu by sliding ZVÆ the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm
(Y page 164).
X Select Mercedes-Benz Apps or Google For individual Mercedes-Benz Apps, it may be
and press W to confirm. necessary to pay license fees before using.
The respective start page appears. Use is then limited to a certain period of time.
X Select Continue to view further content.
License fees must be paid again for use
beyond this time period.
The COMAND functions include the
Resetting adjustments Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website as a prede-
fined favorite.
With the reset function, all Mercedes-Benz X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
Apps settings are reset to the factory set-
by turning c V d the COMAND controller
tings.
bar by turning c V d the COMAND con- X Bring the Mercedes-Benz Mobile Web‐
troller and press W to confirm. site panel to the front by turning cVd the
The carousel view appears. COMAND controller and press W to con-
firm.
the front by turning cVd the COMAND The Mercedes-Benz home page appears.
controller and press W to confirm. i You cannot delete the Mercedes-Benz
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning Mobile Website panel.
W to confirm.
X Select Reset and press W to confirm. Further Mercedes-Benz Apps
A prompt appears asking whether you You can call up additional Mercedes-Benz
really wish to reset. Apps, such as Facebook, or Google™ serv-
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm. ices, such as Street View or Panoramio, here.
The following examples show how to call up
a Mercedes-Benz App, for example Facebook,
and generally how to call up Google™ serv-
ices.
Internet radio 167
To call up Facebook: Calling up the Internet radio

X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
by turning c V d the COMAND controller
controller and pressing W to confirm.
played.
X Select Facebook by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to con- X Select the ® icon in the main function bar
firm. by sliding ZV and turning cV d the
The Facebook home page appears.
X To call up Google™ services: this is done

firm.
through Google™ Local Search The carousel view appears.
(Y page 161).
X Bring the Internet Radio panel to the
i Facebook is a social network. This App front by turning cVd the COMAND con-
allows you to log in from your vehicle and troller and press W to confirm.
use Facebook's many functions.
The Internet radio menu appears.
Google™ Street View allows you to view
streets in 360-degree panoramas.
Google™ Panoramio expands Google Local Searching for stations
Search to include photos at the selected
position. X Select Search in the Internet radio menu.
A list with search criteria appears.
X Select criterion and press W to confirm.
Internet radio
i For example as a search criterion, you can
General notes set an Internet radio station that is located
A good Internet connection is required to close to your navigation destination.
transmit audio data efficiently. To ensure the
best-possible reception, your mobile phone
should be connected to the vehicle's exterior Connecting to a station
antenna via the phone bracket (optional). X Search for a station (Y page 167).
Bear in mind that a relatively large volume of X Select ; (play) in the Internet radio
data can be transmitted when using the Inter- menu and press W to confirm.
net radio. An average 128 kbit per second The call is placed.
data transfer rate can transfer 56MB of data
If the data stream is interrupted, an automatic
in one hour.
attempt is made to re-establish the connec-
The data transfer rate of a station is displayed tion.
while receiving data.
Manually re-establishing a connection
X Select ; (play) again in the Internet
radio menu and press W to confirm.
168 Internet
Ending data transfer: Option 1: entering the web address

X Select É (stop) in the Internet radio You can enter the web address using either
menu and press W to confirm. the character bar or the number keypad
or (Y page 36).
X Change to another audio source, for exam- X Call up the carousel view (Y page 168).
ple Disc
Disc. X Select www by sliding VÆ and turning
If you change to a main function that is not an cVd the COMAND controller and press
audio source, e.g. navigation, the data con- W to confirm.
nection remains on. You can continue listen- An input menu appears.
ing to the set station.
Internet
Display restriction
Internet pages cannot be shown while the

vehicle is in motion.
Calling up a website
Calling up the carousel view X To enter using the character bar: enter
the web address in the input line. Character
entry (Y page 34).
As soon as the first letter has been entered
in the input line, a list appears below it. The
list shows web addresses which begin with
the letters you have entered and web
addresses which have already been called
up.
The list is empty the first time you call it up.

bar by turning c V d the COMAND con-
You can now enter a web address (option 1
(Y page 168)) or select it in the carousel view
(option 2 (Y page 169)).
To select in the carousel view, you must first
create favorites (Y page 173).
Internet 169
X To enter characters using the number X Select the web address by turning cVd or
pad: press the number keys in rapid suc- sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
cession. press W to confirm.
The character appears when the key is The web address is entered in the input line.
pressed. The first available letter is high- X Press W the COMAND controller.
lighted. Enter the character using the char-
The website is called up. The Establish‐
acter bar (Y page 36).
ing data connection to <provider
name>... message appears.
Option 2: selecting favorites

You must create at least one favorite in the
carousel view for this function (Y page 173).

X After entering the web address, select the
¬ symbol by turning cVd or sliding
XVY the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The website is called up.
X To select a web address in the list: slide X Call up the carousel view (Y page 168).
ZV the COMAND controller in the input
X In the carousel view, bring a favorite to the
menu with character bar.
front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the
The list is activated.
firm.
The website is called up.
170 Internet
Navigating the website X Turn cVd the COMAND controller.

A button is highlighted in the example.
Overview
Action Result Example: entering text
X Turn cVd the Navigates from one

controller. item that can be
selected (e.g. link,
text field or selec-
tion list) to the next
and highlights the
respective element
on the website.
Sliding the control- Moves the pointer
ler: on the page.
X Select an input line by turning cVd the

X Left or right XVY
X Up or down ZVÆ
firm.
X Diagonally aVb The character bar appears.
X Press W the con- Calls up the menu or
troller. opens the selected
item.
X Press the k Calls up the previ-
button. ous page.
X Press the 2 Closes the Internet

button. browser. If several
windows are open,
the current window
is closed. X Enter the text using the character bar or the
number keypad. Character entry
Example: highlighting an item that can (Y page 34).
be selected X If the text has been entered, select the
¬ symbol by turning cVd the COMAND
The text has now been entered.
Internet 171
Menu functions X To call up the entire menu: when the

short menu is displayed, slide VÆ the
Calling up the menu COMAND controller downwards.
or
X Select a free area on the website by sliding
ZVÆ, XVY or aVb the COMAND control-
Open
Opens the website to the selectable item.
X Call up the menu (Y page 171).
X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND
X To call up the short menu: highlight the controller.

selectable item on the page by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press Entering a URL
W to confirm. X Call up the menu (Y page 171).
X Select Enter URL by turning cVd or slid-
ing ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 168).
Calling up the previous website

X Select Previous by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Calling up the next website

X Select Next by turning cVd or sliding
W to confirm.
View
You can use this function to:
Rposition a selection window on websites
that are larger than the display
Rselect a window that is already open
172 Internet
X Call up the menu (Y page 171). X Call up the menu (Y page 171).
X Select View by turning cVd or sliding X Select Open In A New Window by turning
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
W to confirm. ler and press W to confirm.
or X To select a window: select View and press
X Press the z key on the number keypad. W to confirm.
X Select the website in the carousel view by
i You cannot use the z key if a phone
turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
call is being made.
X To position the selection window: con-
firm Fullscreen View of Current Add To Favorites
Page by pressing W the COMAND control- Adds the current website to the favorites. The
ler. website can then be called up using the car-
A selection window appears on the web- ousel view. You can save up to 20 favorites in
site. the carousel view.

X Slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND
X Select Add To Favorites by turning
controller and position the selection win-
dow on the website. cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
The following message appears: The page
The selected section is enlarged.
has been added to your favorites.
favorites
X To display and select open windows:
Displaying favorites
select Display Open Windows by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control- X Call up the menu (Y page 171).
ler and press W to confirm. X Select Display Favorites by turning
The carousel view appears. cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
X Press W the COMAND controller. ler and press W to confirm.
The website is displayed. The favorites are shown in the carousel
view.
Exiting the menu Further information on favorites
(Y page 173).
X Call up the menu (Y page 171). Refreshing a website
X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding
X Select Reload by turning cVd or sliding
W to confirm.
The Internet browser is closed. If other win- ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
dows are opened in the background, W to confirm.
another prompt appears.
Other menu functions

Opening in a new window
You can open up to five windows simultane-
ously.
Internet 173
Closing the active window Creating favorites

X Call up the menu (Y page 171). Creating favorites in the carousel view
X Select Close Active Window by turning
X Call up the carousel view (Y page 168).
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
ler and press W to confirm. X Bring the Create New Favorite panel to
the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY
or
X Press the 2 button to the right of the
COMAND controller. X Press W the COMAND controller.
An input menu appears.
i You cannot use the 2 button if a
phone call is being made.
Displaying the complete web address of the
selected link

X Select Link Details by turning cVd or
sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The URL appears.
X Press W the COMAND controller and close
the display. X Enter the web address (URL) and name
Settings using either the character bar or the num-
The settings are described in a separate sec- ber keypad. Entering characters
tion (Y page 175). (Y page 34)
X Select the¬icon and press W to con-
firm.
Favorites The favorite has been created.
Introduction Adding a favorite via the menu

X When a website is displayed, call up the
Favorites are frequently visited websites.
menu.
You have the following options for creating a
X Select Add To Favorites in the menu and
favorite:
press W to confirm (Y page 172).
Rin the carousel view (Y page 173)
Rvia the menu item Add to Favorites Selecting favorites
(Y page 172)
Before creating a favorite in the carousel X Call up the carousel view (Y page 168).
view, you must first close active connections X Select the favorite in the carousel view by
(Y page 159). turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
You can select and edit favorites that you controller and press W to confirm.
have created. The favorite is opened.
174 Internet
Editing favorites Opening in a new window

Editing favorites in the carousel view X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 174).
X Call up the carousel view (Y page 168). X Select Open In A New Window by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND control-
X Select Edit by sliding VÆ and turning
W to confirm. Calling up details
An input menu appears. X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 174).
X Enter the web address (URL) and name X Select Details by turning cVd or sliding
using either the character bar or the num- ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
ber keypad (Y page 34). W to confirm.
Editing favorites in the Favorites menu or
X Call up the menu (Y page 171). X Press the z button on the number key-
X Select Display Favorites by turning
pad (this function is not available if you are
using the telephone at the same time).

W to confirm.
The favorite is displayed. Exiting
X Press W the COMAND controller. X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 174).
The favorites menu appears. X Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding
X Select Edit by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
W to confirm. or
or X Press the k back button on the left next
X Press the g button on the number key- to the COMAND controller.
pad (this function is not available if you are The Favorites menu closes.
using the telephone at the same time).
An input menu appears. Deleting favorites
X Enter the web address (URL) and name Deleting favorites in the carousel view
using either the character bar or the num- X Call up the carousel view (Y page 168).
ber keypad. Character entry (Y page 34).
X Select Delete by sliding VÆ and turning
Other functions in the favorites menu
W to confirm.
Opening current favorites A prompt appears.
X Call up the Favorites menu (Y page 174). X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND The favorite is deleted.

controller. If you select No
celed.
Opens the current favorites in a new window.
Internet 175
Deleting favorites in the Favorites menu RAllow Cookies

X Select Delete by turning cVd or sliding Some websites save information in small
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press text files (cookies) in COMAND. You can
W to confirm. determine whether cookies may be stored.
RCharacter Size
or
X Press the 2 button to the right of the You can select the font size which is used
when displaying the website.
COMAND controller.
RCharacter Code
The favorite is deleted.
You can select a different character set
here, e.g. if the characters of a website
Settings appear distorted.
RDelete Private Data
Settings menu Deletes data which has been saved by the
browser during Internet use.

Changing settings
firm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
X Select Character Size or Character
Code by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the
X Call up the menu (Y page 171). firm.
X Select Settings by turning cVd or sliding X Select a setting using the COMAND con-
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press troller and press W to confirm.
W to confirm.
i If you change the settings, the websites
You can activate/deactivate the following
settings: may not be displayed correctly.
RDownload Images Automatically Delete Private Data
It may take some time to download the
contents of websites that contain a large X Select Delete Private Data and press
amount of images. Therefore, it may be W to confirm.
useful to deactivate this option. A menu appears.
RBlock Pop-Ups
Pop-ups are windows (usually with adver-

tisements) which are displayed automati-
cally when you call up a website. You can
block these displays.
RActivate Javascript
Javascript makes it possible to display and

interact with dynamic content on the web-
site.
176 Internet
Calling up the carousel view and clos-

ing the Internet browser
X To call up the carousel view: press the
k back button for longer than two sec-
onds.
X To close the Internet browser: press the
k back button again for longer than two
seconds.
X Select the setting by turning cVd or sliding

W to confirm.
The # dot in front of an entry indicates
which setting is active.
or
X Select Delete All Data On Exit and
press W to confirm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Option Function
All Deletes all private
data.
Cache Deletes data in the
cache.
Cookies Deletes cookies that
are created by web-
sites which you have
called up.
URL History Deletes all websites
visited (path).
ODelete
Delete All If this function is
Data On Exit activated O, all pri-
vate data is deleted
when you exit the
Internet browser.
i If you reset COMAND to the factory set-

tings (reset function), these settings are
deleted (Y page 47).
177

Radio mode ........................................ 178
Satellite radio .................................... 182
CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode ........ 187
Music search ..................................... 200
MUSIC REGISTER .............................. 203
Bluetooth® audio mode .................... 207
Operation with the Media Inter-
face .................................................... 213
Audio AUX mode ............................... 220
Audio
178 Radio mode
Your COMAND equipment Switching modes via the audio menu
These operating instructions describe all the

COMAND system, as available at the time of
Radio mode
Audio
Example: audio menu

Important notes
: Current audio operating mode
Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may ; Main function bar
seriously impair radio reception.
= Audio menu
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
Switching to radio mode sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
Switching modes using the function If radio mode was the last mode selected,
button it will now be active.
X Press the $ function button. If another audio mode is switched on, you
The radio display appears. You will hear the can now switch to radio mode in the audio
last station played on the last waveband. menu.
i Repeatedly pressing this function button X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
switches through the wavebands in this controller and press W to confirm.
order: FM, AM, WB. You then call up satel- The audio menu appears.
lite radio mode. Pressing the button again
takes you back to FM radio mode.
Example: HD Radio display

: Display window with station settings
; Preset position of the selected station
= Name of the selected station (symbol for
HD Radio™ and number of subprogram)
? Frequency of the selected station
Radio mode 179
A Sound settings Rclear, interference free reception.

B FM radio, AM radio or WB radio RFM: CD quality sound.
C Program information AM: analog FM station sound quality.
Rthe display of text-based information
D Preset functions
E Radio functions
(e.g. artist, track name) in the display
For further information on HD Radio™, visit
X Select FM/AM Radio by turning cVd the http://www.hdradio.com.
firm.
Switching wavebands
You can switch the radio between the FM, AM
Switching HD Radio on/off
Audio
and WB wavebands.
You can switch off HD Radio™ in the radio : Waveband submenu

submenu:
XOption 1: press the $ function button
X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding until the desired waveband is set.
VÆ the COMAND controller and press W i Repeatedly pressing this function button
to confirm. switches through the wavebands in this
X Select HD Radio and press W to confirm. order: FM, AM, WB. You then call up satel-
HD Radio™ on: O lite radio mode. Pressing the button again
HD Radio™ off: ª takes you back to FM radio mode.
X Option 2: select FMFM, AM or WB in the radio
i Notes on HD Radio™:
display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
HD Radio™ is a digital radio system from COMAND controller and press W to con-
the U.S.A. When HD Radio is off, you will
firm.
hear only analog programs on all frequen-
X The waveband submenu is opened.
cies.
X Select a waveband and press W to confirm.
HD Radio™ provides:
You will hear the last station played on the
Rdigitaltransmission on the same wave- selected waveband. The # dot shows the
bands as analog AM/FM. The analog currently selected waveband.
AM/FM stations remain in the same
position when selecting a station.
Rbroadcasting of several program streams
over a single FM frequency (e.g. HD1,
HD2, etc.).
180 Radio mode
Selecting a station Waveband Frequency

Selects stations via the station search AM (MF) 530 - 1700 kHz
function
FM (VHF) 87.7 - 107.9 MHz
X Press the E or F button.
or WB (Weather Band) Weather report
channels
X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con-
troller while the display/selection window
in the radio display is active. i You can only enter currently permitted
Station search scans up or down and stops numbers.
at the next station found. i If you enter a frequency in the FM or AM
wavebands which is outside the frequency
Audio
Selecting station via the station presets range, COMAND sets the next lower fre-
quency.
X Quick setting: press a number key, e.g.
l.
X Directly in the station presets: select Storing station
Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd Storing station manually
confirm. There are ten presets available for the FM and
or AM wavebands.
X When the display/selection window is
active, press W the COMAND controller.
The station preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates under which preset the
currently selected station is stored.
X Select a station by turning cVd and press-
ing W to confirm or press a number key,
e.g. l.
Selecting stations by entering the fre-

Example: station presets
quency manually
X Quick save: press and hold a number key,
X Option 1: press the l button. e.g. l, until you hear a tone.
X Option 2: select Radio in the radio display The station is stored.
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
firm.
X Select Enter Frequency and press W to
confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, an input
menu will appear.
X Enter a frequency using the number keys.
COMAND sets the frequency entered.
Radio mode 181
X Directly in the station presets: press W Weather Band

the COMAND controller when the display/
selection window is active. Activating
or X Press the $ function button repeatedly
X Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning until the Weather Band is switched on.
cVd the COMAND controller and press or
W to confirm. X Select the currently set waveband FM or
In both cases, the station presets appear. AM by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
The # dot indicates under which preset COMAND controller and press W to con-
the currently selected station is stored. firm.
X Select a preset by turning cVd the X Select WB from the menu and press W to
Audio
COMAND controller and press and hold confirm.
W until you hear a tone.
The station is stored under the preset. Searching for a channel
X Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the
Storing station automatically
COMAND controller while the display/
This function automatically stores stations selection window is active.
with adequate reception under the presets. or
The search starts at the lowest frequency. X Press the E or F button.
COMAND stores any stations found, begin- Channel search scans up or down and
ning with preset 1. When the highest fre- stops at the next channel found.
quency is reached or 10 stations have been
found, the storing process ends. Any stations
stored manually under the presets will be lost. Selecting a channel from the channel
COMAND may not occupy all memory slots list
when storing.
X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller
when the display/selection window is
active.
The channel preset memory appears.
X Option 2: select Presets by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
The channel preset memory appears.
X Irrespective of the option, select Autos‐
tore and press W to confirm. X Select Channel by sliding VÆ and turning
In both cases, COMAND searches for sta- cVd the COMAND controller and press
tions that can be received. You will see a W to confirm.
message to this effect. The available sta- The channel list appears.
tions are automatically stored in the preset
positions.
X To cancel storing: select Cancel and
press W to confirm.
182 Satellite radio
X Select a channel by turning cVd the This function is only available for analog FM
COMAND controller and press W to con- programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD
firm. Radio™).
or Information relevant to the current station is
X Press a number key on the control panel, shown in the display window.
e.g. n, at any time. X Select Info in the radio display by sliding
Displaying station information Information on the currently selected sta-
tion is displayed. Content is dependent on
the station.
X To return to the radio display: confirm
Audio
Info by pressing W.
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.
Satellite radio
Important notes
i The SatRadio mode described below
This function is only available for analog FM requires optional satellite radio equipment
programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD and registration with a satellite radio pro-
Radio™). vider.
Information relevant to the current station is
shown below the main function bar.
i Note that the categories and channels
shown in the illustrations depend on the
X Select Show Station Information by
program content offered by the provider.
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND The program content may vary. The illus-
controller and press W to confirm. trations and descriptions in these operat-
Depending on the previous status, you ing instructions may therefore differ from
switch Show Station Information on the channels and categories offered by the
O or off ª. provider.
SatRadio mode may be temporarily unavail-
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
Displaying program information These reasons include environmental or
topographical conditions as well as other
issues beyond the control of Mercedes-
Benz USA, LLC. This means operation may
not be possible in certain areas.
These include:
Rtunnels
Rparking garages
Rlocations inside or next to buildings
Rlocations in the vicinity of other struc-
tures
Satellite radio 183
i SIRIUS XM Radio offers more than 130 appears in the display, followed by the sat-
radio stations in digital quality, for example ellite radio main menu.
100% commercial-free music, sports, news
and entertainment. i You can also have the satellite service
activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS
SIRIUS XM Radio employs a fleet of high-
XM Radio website at
performance satellites to broadcast around
http://www.sirius.com (USA) or
the clock in the contiguous USA and Can-
http://www.siriuscanada.com (Can-
ada.
ada).
The satellite radio program is available for
a monthly fee. Details are available from i If registration is not included when pur-
the SIRIUS XM Service Center and at chasing the system, your credit card details
http://www.sirius.com (USA) or will be required to activate your account.
Audio
http://www.siriuscanada.com (Can- If the satellite receiver is not installed or is
ada). not installed correctly, the Device
Unavailable message will appear.
Registering SatRadio
Switching on satellite radio mode
Notes
For example, to select a channel or scroll in
the lists, you can also use the =;
9: buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel, see the separate vehicle
Operator's Manual.
Important information on registering the sat-
ellite radio (Y page 183).
Service information screen Option 1

: Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM)
; SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver
X Press the $ function button.
The No Service message appears after
X Switch on SatRadio mode (Y page 183). switching on or if no signal is being
The satellite radio main menu appears, received. Once COMAND receives the sig-
showing the weather channel. You cannot nal, the satellite radio display appears. The
select any other stations. station last selected is played.
X In the lower menu line, select Sat and press i Repeatedly pressing this function button
W to confirm.
switches through the wavebands in this
X Select Service and press W to confirm. order: FM, AM, WB and subsequently
The service information screen appears. switches on the satellite radio. Pressing the
Once the connection has been established: button again takes you back to FM radio
mode.
X Follow the instructions of the service staff.
The activation process may take up to
ten minutes. If the activation is completed
successfully, the No Service message
184 Satellite radio
Option 2:
The No Service message appears when

starting up or if no signal is being received.
Audio
Satellite radio main menu

: Satellite radio main display If the satellite receiver is not installed or is not
; Channel name installed correctly, the Device Unavaila‐
ble message will appear.
= Preset
? Selected category/channel number Changing the category
A Channel information (in brief)
Satellite radio channels are sorted into vari-
B Sound settings
ous categories. You can choose between var-
C Category list ious categories such as News/Discussions,
D Channel information (in detail) Sports and Country (if available). The cate-
E Channel preset list gory list is sorted alphabetically.
F Satellite radio menu X To call up the category list: select Cat‐
egory by turning cVd the COMAND con-
Channel information A can be viewed in
detail (Y page 187). The category list appears.
X To select a category: select a category by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND turning cVd the COMAND controller and
controller and press W to confirm. press W to confirm.
If satellite radio mode was the last mode The category selected is shown in the dis-
selected, it will now be active. play. You hear the station last selected for
If another audio mode is switched on, you this category.
can now switch to satellite radio mode in The All Channels category is at the top
the audio menu. of the category list. This category is sorted
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND by channel number and allows you to
controller and press W to confirm. browse all available channels.
The audio menu appears.
X Select Sat and press W to confirm.
Satellite radio 185
Selecting a channel Entering channel numbers directly

Channel search X Option 1: press the l button.
X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND con-
X Option 2: select Sat in the submenu bar
troller while the display/selection window
in the SatRadio display is active. by turning cVd the COMAND controller
or and press W to confirm.
X Select Enter Channel and press W to
COMAND searches in both directions confirm.
(ascending and descending) and stops at An input menu appears.
the next channel found in the selected cat- Entering the channel
egory. XWith both options, press the corresponding
Audio
number buttons on the control unit in suc-
cession.
COMAND sets the selected channel.
i You can only select currently permitted
digits.
Satellite radio menu

X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning
W to confirm.
The satellite radio menu appears.
Selecting a channel from the SatRadio
channel list
You can select the channel from the channel
list (option 1) or via the channel list that
shows the artists and tracks that are currently
being played (option 2).
X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning
W to confirm.
Option 1
X Select Channel List and press W to con-
firm.
The channel list appears.
X Select a channel by turning cVd the
firm.
186 Satellite radio
Option 2: cates that the currently selected channel is

X Select Channel List with Artist, stored under this preset.
Title and press W to confirm. X Select a preset by turning cVd the
The channel list appears and displays the COMAND controller and press and hold
artists and tracks currently being played. W until you hear a tone.
or
X Press and hold a number button, e.g.
n, until you hear a tone.
The channel is stored under the preset.
Storing channels automatically
This function automatically stores channels
Audio
with adequate reception in the preset mem-

ory. Channels stored manually in the preset
memory will be overwritten.
X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller
X Select a channel by turning cVd the when the display/selection window is
COMAND controller and press W to con- active.
firm. X Select Autostore in the presets by turning
Memory functions W to confirm.
X Option 2: select Presets in the submenu
bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
firm.
X Select Autostore and press W to confirm.
In both cases, COMAND searches for chan-
nels that can be received. You will see a
message to this effect. The available chan-
nels are automatically stored in the preset
positions.
Channel presets X To cancel storing: select Cancel and
There are ten presets available. press W to confirm.
Storing channels Selecting a channel from the preset list
X Press W the COMAND controller when the X To call up the preset list: select Pre‐
display/selection window is active. sets by turning cVd the COMAND con-
or troller and press W to confirm.
X Select Presets in the submenu bar by turn- The channel preset list appears.
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press X To set a channel: select a preset by turn-
W to confirm. ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
In both cases, the channel presets appear. W to confirm.
The # dot in front of a preset entry indi- or
X Press a number key, such as n.
CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode 187
Displaying information general questions or questions on the ver-

sions available.
X Select Sat Radio in the submenu bar by
press W to confirm.
X Select Service and press W to confirm.
The provider's details appear.
X To return to the SatRadio main display:
Channel list updates
Audio
X Select Info in the submenu bar by turning
When receiving a new channel list, the display
shows the Updating Channels... mes-
W to confirm.
sage.
Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed. The station last selected is switched to mute
until the update has been completed. SatRa-
If available, you will see: dio mode is not available during this process.
Rthe full channel name Once the update has been completed, the
Rthe artist of the track that is currently being SatRadio basic menu appears. The station
played last selected is played.
Rthe track that is currently being played
X To return to the radio display: confirm Sound settings
Info by pressing W. Information on sound settings (Y page 30).
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.
Displaying service information CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode

Important safety notes
G WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the CD/DVD drive housing, you
could be exposed to invisible laser radiation.
This laser radiation could damage your retina.
There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
: Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) or
Call Service Provider G WARNING
; SIRIUS ID of your satellite receiver Handling discs while driving may distract you
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
The provider's customer service center is
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
available by phone at any time to answer any
accident.
Z
188 CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station- Ejecting a disc from the single DVD
ary. drive
X Press the 8 eject button.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is cov- X Take the disc out of the slot.
ering a distance of 44 feet (approximately If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it
14 m) every second. is drawn in again automatically after a short
while and reloaded.
G WARNING
SD cards are small objects measuring 24 x 32 Inserting discs into the DVD changer
x 2.1 mm. Small parts can be swallowed and
are a choking hazard. There is a risk of fatal The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with
injury. six trays.
Audio
Keep SD cards out of the reach of children. If X To insert a CD/DVD into the magazine
an SD card is swallowed, seek immediate tray: press the V load/eject button.
medical attention. A menu shows the current load status of
the magazine trays. The last tray selected
is identified by a red digit.
Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs
Notes
If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must
face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted.
If neither side is printed, the side to be played
should face downwards. The system may not
be able to play CDs/DVDs with copy protec-
tion.
i If a medium contains other files in addi-
tion to music files, the loading time before
the first track starts to play may be longer. X Select a magazine tray to be filled by turn-
Inserting a disc into the single DVD W to confirm.
drive or
X Press a number key, e.g. j.
X Press the 8 eject button.
The DVD changer switches to the selected
If there is a disc already inserted, it will be
magazine tray. You see the Please
ejected.
Wait... message.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
You then see the Please insert disc
X Insert a disc into the slot.
<x> message.
If the disc is correctly inserted and is a suit-
able disc, it is drawn in by the drive and
played.
X To exit the menu: press the V eject/

load button again or press the k back
button.
or
X Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning
W to confirm.
X To fill empty magazine trays: press the
V load/eject button.
The magazine menu appears.
X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the X Select Fill Empty Slots.
Slots
printed side facing upwards.
Audio
You see the Please Wait... message.
The DVD changer loads the disc into the COMAND switches to the next free maga-
selected magazine tray. The Loading zine tray. You then see the Please
disc <x>... message appears. insert disc <x> message.
i It may take some time for the disc to be i Do not insert a disc into the magazine tray
loaded, depending on the type of disc. If no until you have seen this prompt.
disc is inserted for approximately 20 sec- X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the
onds, the display returns to the magazine printed side facing upwards.
menu. You see the Please Wait... message.
The DVD changer plays the disc if: Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer
switches to the next empty tray. You see
Rit has been inserted correctly.
the Please insert disc <x> message.
Rit is a permissible type of disc. X Repeat this step until all trays are loaded.
The DVD changer plays the last disc you
loaded if it has been inserted correctly and
it is a permissible type.
XTo cancel loading: press the V eject/
button.
i If you cancel loading with the k back
button, the system loads and plays the last
CD you inserted.
: Full magazine tray (eject function is avail- Ejecting discs from the DVD changer
able)
; Empty magazine tray (disc can be If you remove one disc while playing another
inserted) disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback.
Playback continues once the disc has been
ejected.
X To eject a CD/DVD: press the V load/
eject button.
The magazine menu appears. The magazine
tray with the current disc is highlighted.
Z
: Eject possible X To eject all CDs/DVDs: press the V

; Type of data medium load/eject button.
Audio
= Disc name (only if stored on the disc) The magazine menu appears.
? Current disc X Select Eject All by sliding ÆV and turn-
X Select a magazine tray containing a disc by ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
turning cVd the COMAND controller and W to confirm.
press W to confirm. The DVD changer ejects the last disc
or selected. You see the Ejecting disc
<x>... message.
X Press a number key, e.g. j.
X Take the disc out of the disc slot when you
You see the message: Ejecting disc
see the Please remove disc <x>. mes-
<x>.... You then see the following mes-
<x>...
sage.
sage.
The DVD changer switches to the next
loaded magazine tray and ejects the disc.
X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
empty.
X To exit the menu: press the V eject/
button.
or
X Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning
W to confirm.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot,
COMAND will draw it in automatically after
Inserting and ejecting an SD memory
a short while and load it again.
card
General information
COMAND supports SD memory cards
(Secure Digital), SDHC memory cards
(Secure Digital High Capacity) and SDXC
memory cards (Secure Digital eXtended
Capacity.
i Not all memory cards available on the X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to
market are designed for the temperatures the USB port.
which may be reached in the vehicle. If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see
If the SD memory card is no longer in use, a message to this effect.
you should remove it from COMAND. High The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The
temperatures can damage the card. first MP3 track is then played. Further
Due to the wide range of SD memory cards tracks are loaded in the background; this is
available on the market, playback cannot indicated by an hourglass symbol.
be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory i Due to the wide range of USB devices
card.
available on the market, playback cannot
The readable storage capacity depends on be guaranteed for all brands of USB device.
the memory card used. You can obtain fur-
Audio
Information about suitable USB devices
ther information at any authorized
can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
MP3 players must support Media Transfer
Inserting an SD memory card
Protocol (MTP). The MTP mode must be
X Insert the memory card into the slot on the active.
control panel until it engages in place. The
side with the contacts must face down-
wards and point towards the slot. Switching to audio CD/DVD or MP3
If no MP3 tracks can be found, you will see mode
a message to this effect.
Inserting or connecting a medium
The first 100 MP3 tracks are loaded. The
first MP3 track is then played. Further X Insert CDs/DVDs (Y page 188)
tracks are loaded in the background; this is or
indicated by an hourglass symbol. X Insert an SD memory card (Y page 191)
or
Ejecting an SD memory card X Connect a USB device (Y page 191).
X Press the memory card. COMAND loads the medium inserted and
The memory card is ejected. starts to play it.
X Remove the memory card from slot.
Switching modes using the function
button
Connecting a USB device X Press the h function button one or more
The USB port is located in the stowage com- times.
partment in the center console. By pressing the function button repeatedly,
Electrical consumption at this connection you can change the operating mode in the
must not exceed a continuous current of following order:
500 mA. If the electrical consumption is RCD/audio DVD/video DVD/MP3 CD/MP3
higher, use a separate source to provide
DVD in the DVD changer or single DVD
power for the USB device (e.g.
drive (disc mode)
12 V power supply).
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
Z
RUSB storage device ? Graphic time and track display

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode A Disc type, disc position in the media list
RBluetooth® audio mode and disc name (if stored on the disc as CD
X Select an audio medium from the media list text or if Gracenote® data is available)
(Y page 193). B Artist (if stored on the disc as CD text or
if Gracenote® data is available)
Switching modes via the audio menu C CD mode menu
X Select Audio in the main function bar by Example display: audio DVD mode
The last active audio source is now acti-
Audio
vated.
You can activate a different audio source
using the audio menu.
X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning
c V d the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Disc
Disc, Memory Card,
Card Music Reg‐ : Cover (if available)
ister USB Storage or Media Inter‐
ister, ; Track time
face and press W to confirm.
= Track number
This switches to the desired audio source.
? Graphic time and track display
X Select an audio medium from the media list
A Disc type, disc position in the media list,
(Y page 193).
disc name (only if stored on the disc)
B Audio DVD mode menu
Example display: audio CD mode
Example display: MP3 mode
: CD cover (if available)

; Gracenote® media data found, then the : Cover (if available)
elapsed track time
; Track time
= Track number and track name (if stored
= Track number and name
on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote®
data is available) ? Graphic time and track display
A Medium type, position of medium in the Stop function

media list, current folder or current album
This function is only available in audio DVD
B Artist (if available)
mode.
C MP3 mode menu
X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 191).
i If no Media Interface is connected during X To interrupt playback: select É by
operation with a DVD changer, C displays sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
Changer instead of Media (Y page 213). controller and press W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The
É symbol remains highlighted.
Pause function
X To continue playback: select Ì and
In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode press W to confirm.
Audio
Playback continues from the point where it
X To pause playback: briefly press the
was interrupted.
8 button.
The , symbol appears at the top left in X To stop playback: while playback is inter-
the status bar. rupted, select É again and press W to
X To continue playback: briefly press the confirm.
8 button again. or
The , symbol disappears. X Select É and confirm by pressing W
twice in rapid succession.
In audio DVD mode only Ì is highlighted.
X To restart playback: select Ì and
X To pause playback: switch on audio DVD
press W to confirm.
mode (Y page 191).
Playback starts at the beginning of the
X Select Ë by sliding VÆ and turning
DVD.
W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. Selecting CD/audio DVD/MP3 discs
press W to confirm. Selecting via the media list
was interrupted. The Ì display changes
to Ë.
Media list when equipped with a DVD changer

X In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select
Media or Changer by sliding VÆ and turn-
Z
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press The following tables list the selection options
W to confirm. in the media list for the respective equipment
In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select variants.
Media by sliding VÆ or turning cVd the For DVD changer
firm. Magazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readable
The media list appears. The # dot indicates data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3
the current medium being played. DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs.
The media list shows the discs currently Memory card, position 7
available.
View in :: MUSIC REGISTER, position 8
Audio
RG magazine tray not shown USB storage device, position 9

RI magazine tray shown Media Interface, position 0
XTo switch the display: select 1...6 Bluetooth Audio
Changer by turning cVd the COMAND
Depending on the previous setting, the Equipped with a single DVD drive
magazine trays are shown or not shown. DVD drive, position 1: readable data media
i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs,
next to the corresponding magazine tray. audio DVDs and video DVDs.
Memory card, position 2
MUSIC REGISTER, position 3
USB storage device, position 4
Media Interface, position 5
Bluetooth® audio: position 6
i If you select a video DVD, the system

switches to video DVD mode
Media list showing all magazine trays (Y page 224).
X Select the data medium by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to Selecting a track using the number key-
confirm. pad
X When the display/selection window is
active, press a number key, e.g. n.
The medium at the corresponding position
in the media list is loaded and then played.
Selecting a track Selecting a track using music search

Selecting by skipping to a track
X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the dis-
play/selection window is active.
or
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
The skip back function skips to the begin-
Audio
ning of the current track if the track has X Select Current Tracklist,
Tracklist Folder or a
been playing for more than eight seconds.
category and press W to confirm.
If the track has been playing for less than
eight seconds, it skips to the start of the Select music via categories (e.g. album,
previous track. artist) with the music search function.
If the Random Tracks or Random Folder If you select a category, COMAND starts a
playback option has been selected, the search for track information if the following
track order is random. conditions are fulfilled:
Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected
Selecting a track using the number key- Rthe track information from these data car-
pad riers is not yet contained in the COMAND
X Press the ¯ key on the number keypad. music database.
A numerical entry field appears. The num- COMAND imports track information from the
ber of positions offered corresponds to the following data carriers:
number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Only RDisc (CD/audio DVD/MP3)
numbers that correspond to a track num- RMemory card
ber on the CD/DVD can be entered. RMUSIC REGISTER
X Enter the desired track number using the
RUSB storage device
number keys.
The track plays after the last possible num- The Track information is complete
ber is entered. message appears once the search is com-
pleted. COMAND stores the music data in its
i Pressing and holding a number key for
own database. You can now select the avail-
more than two seconds completes the able music data within the desired category.
entry, and the corresponding track is
played. You will find further information on searching
for music in the "Music search" section
(Y page 200).
X In audio CD/audio DVD mode/MP3 mode,
select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
W to confirm.
The category list appears.
Z
bottom right-hand corner of certain audio dis-

plays.
Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND
uses the information contained therein to dis-
play the artist, album and track name.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text
information, COMAND can use the Grace-
note® Media Database to identify unknown
audio tracks when in audio CD mode. This is
only possible if the relevant information is
Example: current track list saved in the Gracenote® Media Database and
if the "Gracenote Media Database" function
Audio
X Select the track by turning c V d the

is activated.
If this is the case, COMAND will display the
firm.
corresponding data such as artist, album and
The basic display appears and the track is
track name in the relevant displays and lists.
played.
Selecting Gracenote® data to be dis-
played
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X While the display/selection window is
active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND
controller until the desired position has
been reached.
or
X Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
Gracenote® Media Database

X Switch on CD mode (Y page 191).
Introduction X Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
This function is only available in audio CD the COMAND controller and press W to
mode. confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
The # dot indicates the current selection
for the display.
If several entries exist for the CD of a partic-
There is a version of
ular artist, you can select which of the entries
Gracenote® music recognition technology
should be shown.
on the COMAND hard drive. You will recog-
nize this by the logo which can be seen in the If the inserted CD does not contain any
Gracenote® data, the Gracenote Media
Database menu item is shown in gray and Displaying the track and album
cannot be selected.
X Press the z button.
The current track and album are displayed
COMAND controller and press W to con- in a window.
firm.
Switching the Gracenote® data display Displaying metadata (MP3 mode)

on/off
COMAND can also display the album name
X Switch on CD mode (Y page 191). and artist (metadata) during playback if this
X Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd information has been entered into the sys-
the COMAND controller and press W to tem.
Audio
confirm. For all media that contain MP3 data (e.g. MP3
X Select Gracenote Media Database by CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), you
turning cVd the COMAND controller and can determine whether:
press W to confirm. Rthe metadata contained in the tags of the
encoded music data should be displayed
X To switch off the display: select None and
Rthe file and directory names should be dis-
press W to confirm.
played during playback
In the basic display, Track 1,
1 Track 2 etc.
X To display the album and artist name:
are shown instead of the Gracenote® data,
for example (Y page 192). select MP3 or USB in the basic display by
X To switch on the display: select an entry controller and press W to confirm.
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select Display Track Information and
press W to confirm.
Updating Gracenote® music recogni-

tion technology and the Gracenote Selecting a group (audio DVD)
Media Database
The content of an audio DVD can be divided
Due to the release of new CDs, the digital data into up to 9 groups. The availability and type
on the Gracenote Media Database must be of group depends on the respective DVD.
updated. Optimum functionality can only be
A group can contain music in different sound
attained with up-to-date Gracenote® music qualities (stereo and multichannel formats,
recognition technology. Information about for example), or bonus tracks.
new versions can be obtained from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Each group can contain up to 99 tracks.
You can have your music recognition soft- If an audio DVD only contains one audio for-
ware updated there with a DVD, or you can mat, the Group menu item(s) cannot be
update it yourself. selected.
X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 191).
i The Gracenote Media Database is
X Select DVD-A by sliding VÆ and turning
updated in conjunction with the navigation
system's digital map (Y page 118). cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Z
X Select Group by turning cVd and press to the MP3 data carrier when it is created.
W to confirm. Alphabetical order is the most common.
The # dot indicates the group currently Once all the tracks in a folder have been
selected. played, the tracks in the next folder are
X Select the desired group by turning cVd
played.
RRandom Medium
X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
controller or press the k back button.
RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only)
You will hear the tracks in the current play-

Selecting an active partition (USB list or currently active folder (including all
mass storage devices only) subfolders) in random order.
Audio
You can select this function for USB mass i The Normal Track Sequence option is
storage devices when the storage device is automatically selected when you change
partitioned. Up to 5 partitions (primary or log- the disc you are currently listening to or
ical, FAT, FAT32 and NTFS) are supported. when you select a different medium. If an
option is selected, it remains selected after
X Select MP3 in the basic display by sliding
COMAND is switched on or off.
X Select Select Active Partition and Notes on MP3 mode
press W to confirm.
General notes
Depending on the volume and format of the
Playback options MP3 data, the length of time required for
reading the data may increase.
X To select options: switch to CD/audio
DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 191).
Permissible data carriers
X Select CD
CD, DVD-A or MP3 by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and RCD-R and CD-RW
press W to confirm. RDVD-R and DVD-RW
The options list appears. The # dot indi- RDVD+R and DVD+RW
cates the option selected. RSD memory card
X Select an option by turning cVd and press RUSB storage device
W to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options Permissible file systems
except Normal Track Sequence,
Sequence you will
RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window. RUDF for audio and video DVDs
The following options are available to you: RFAT16, FAT32 and NTFS for SD memory
RNormal
card and USB storage media
Track Sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
In MP3 mode, the track order is determined
by the order in which the tracks are written
Multisession CDs Permissible formats

For multisession CDs, the content of the first COMAND supports the following formats:
session determines how COMAND will proc- RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
ess the CD. COMAND plays only one session RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V8 and V9
and gives priority to the audio CD session.
(WMA) without copy protection
If possible, use COMAND to play only CDs
Microsoft Windows Media Audio V2, V7, V8
that have been written in one session.
and V9 (WMA)
Radditional music files in AAC format with
File structure of a data carrier
the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a
When you create a disc with compressed and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes
music files, the tracks can be organized in music files with the extension .m4p.
Audio
folders. A folder may also contain subfolders.
The disc may contain no more than eight
i If, in addition to MP3 files, there are other
directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level music files in these audio formats stored on
will not be recognized by the system. the disc, the loading process may require a
longer time before the first track is played.
i COMAND loads up to 15,000 tracks from
an SD memory card or USB storage
i The MP3 audio encoding method is under
medium. license from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut Integ-
rierte Schaltungen – Institute for Integrated
Circuits) and Thomson.
Track and file names
When you create a disc with compressed Permissible bit and sampling rates
music files, you can assign names to the
tracks and folders. COMAND supports MP3 files of the following
types:
COMAND uses these names accordingly for
the display. Folders that contain data other Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s
than MP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by to 320 kbit/s
COMAND. Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root COMAND supports WMA files of the follow-
directory itself, the root directory will also be ing types:
treated as a folder. COMAND will then show Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s
the name of the root directory as the folder Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
name.
COMAND does not support WMA files of the
You should observe the following when
following types:
assigning track names:
RDRM (Digital Rights Management)
Rtrack names must have at least one char-
encrypted files
acter.
Rvariable bit rate
Rtrack names must have the extension
RWMA Pro
"mp3" or "wma".
Rthere must be a dot between the track R5.1 surround sound
name and the extension. i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least
Example of a correct track name: 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
"Track1.mp3". 44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a notice-
able deterioration in quality. This is espe-
Z
200 Music search
cially the case if you have activated a sur- i On many DVD audio discs, the last track
round sound function. does not contain any music. If COMAND
then switches to the next disc, it is normal
Notes on copyright system behavior and does not mean that
there is a malfunction.
MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play
back are generally subject to copyright pro- i COMAND is able to play back audio CDs
tection in accordance with the applicable in multichannel audio format.
international and national regulations.
In many countries, reproductions, even for
private use, are not permitted without the Music search
prior consent of the copyright holder. Calling up a category list
Make sure that you know about the applicable
Audio
copyright regulations and that you comply

with these.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your
own compositions and recordings, or if the
copyright holder has granted you permission,
these restrictions do not apply.
Notes on CDs/DVDs
! COMAND is designed to play discs that
comply with the EN 60908 standard. There-
Category list
fore, you can only use discs with a maxi-
mum thickness of 1.3 mm. X Switch on an audio source and call up the
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that basic display, e.g. MP3 mode
contain data on both sides (DVD on one (Y page 191).
side and audio data on the other), they can- X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
not be ejected and can damage the device. cVd the COMAND controller and press
Only use round discs with a diameter of W to confirm.
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of The category list appears.
8 cm, even with an adapter. The categories are displayed according to the
Discs with copy protection are not compati- data available. The categories Current
ble with the audio CD standard and therefore Tracklist, Folder
Tracklist Folder, Playlists (if available)
may not be able to be played by COMAND. and Photos (if available) are already
Playback problems may occur when playing assigned. The other available categories are
copied discs. There is a wide range of data filled by the music search.
carriers, disc-writing software and writers
available. This variety means that there is no
guarantee that the system will be able to play Selecting a category
discs that you have copied yourself. Starting a music search
There may be playback problems if you play
CDs that you have copied yourself with a stor- Select music via categories (e.g. album,
age capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs of artist) with the music search function.
this type do not conform to the currently
applicable standards.
Music search 201
If you select a category, COMAND starts a Selecting an album

music search under the following conditions:
Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected
Rthe music tracks on these data carriers are
not yet in the COMAND music database.
COMAND reads music tracks from the fol-
lowing data carriers:
RDisc(CD/audio DVD/MP3)
RMemory card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
Audio
X Select Albums in the category list by turn-
W to confirm.
The available albums are displayed alpha-
betically. If there is a cover available for an
album, it is displayed in front of the album
name.
Selecting a track
X Select a category in the category list by

press W to confirm.
The Reading Data... message appears.
The search may take some time, depending
on the number of tracks available.
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is com-
pleted. Playback then starts with the previ-
ously active audio source. X Select Tracks in the category list
X To cancel the music search: confirm (Y page 200) by turning cVd the COMAND
Cancel by pressing W. controller and press W to confirm.
The available tracks are displayed.
Selecting artists
X Select Artists in the category list by turn-
W to confirm.
The available artists are displayed alpha-
betically.
Z
202 Music search
Selecting a year of publication COMAND controller and press W to con-

firm.
The available covers are displayed in alpha-
betical order of the artists.
Audio
X Select Year in the category list

(Y page 200) by turning cVd the COMAND
X Select an entry and press W to confirm. X Select the desired cover by turning cVd
The genre list is displayed. the COMAND controller and press W to
X Select a genre, e.g. pop, and press W to confirm.
confirm. The corresponding album is played.
The track list is displayed.
X Select a track and press W to confirm. Selecting via keyword search
Playback starts. X Select Keyword Search in the category list
Selecting composers and press W to confirm.
X Select Composers in the category list by
press W to confirm.
The available composers are displayed
alphabetically.
Selecting music genres

X Select Genres in the category list by turn-
W to confirm.
The available music genres are displayed
alphabetically. X To change the character set used in the
character bar: highlight Select by sliding
Selecting a cover VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con-
X Select Select By Cover in the category A list of available character sets is shown.
list (Y page 200) by turning cVd the
MUSIC REGISTER 203
X Select the desired character set and press X Confirm the album with W.
W to confirm. The tracks on the album are displayed.
X Enter characters and confirm the entry.
Character entry (Y page 34).
Depending on the entry, the hits are shown
in a list.
Audio
X Select a track and press W to confirm.
Playback starts and the basic display
appears.

COMAND controller and press W to con- MUSIC REGISTER
firm.
General notes
! Retain the original music files in a secure
location. An error in COMAND might result
in the loss of the music files stored in the
MUSIC REGISTER. Mercedes-Benz is not
liable for any loss of data.
You can store music files in a compressed
format in the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 204). The memory has a capacity of
10 GB.
X Select an entry, e.g. Artists

Artists, and press
W to confirm.
The album and cover (if available) are dis-
played.
Z
204 MUSIC REGISTER
Switching to the MUSIC REGISTER X Confirm the message by pressing W and

store the music data (Y page 204).
MUSIC REGISTER basic display
Switching modes via the audio menu
If MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode
selected, it is now switched on.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in
Audio
the audio menu.
Example: MUSIC REGISTER

X Select Audio by sliding Z V and turning
: Cover (if available) c V d the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
; Track time
= Track number and name
? Graphic time and track display
X Select Music Register and press W to
confirm.
A Position of the medium in the media list
and name of the medium, followed by the
current playback option (no display for Switching on with the number buttons
Normal Track Sequence)
Sequence X Make sure that neither radio nor disc is
B Artist activated.
C MUSIC REGISTER menu bar X Press the r (for a DVD changer) or
m (for a single DVD drive) number key.
Switching modes using the function The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
button
X Press the h function button repeatedly
Importing music files
until the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
By pressing the function button repeatedly, Introduction
you can change the operating mode in the
You can copy music files from the data carrier
following order:
in the single DVD drive or in the DVD changer
RCD/audio DVD/MP3 (disc) in the following file formats:
RMemory card mode RMP3
RMUSIC REGISTER
RWMA
RUSB storage device
RAAC (with file extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode and .aac)
X Switch on CD mode (Y page 191).
If music files are available, playback begins at X With an audio CD inserted, select REC in the
the point last listened to. basic CD display by sliding VÆ and turning
If there are no music files, you will see a mes- cVd the COMAND controller and press
sage to this effect. W to confirm.
MUSIC REGISTER 205
i CD information such as album name, disc

name, artist and track is provided by the
Gracenote Media Database (Y page 196).
Step 1: selecting tracks to import
: To create a new folder (standard)

; Existing folders
Audio
= Currently selected folder
X Select a folder by turning cVd the
: To record all music files (standard)
firm.
; To copy single tracks O
If you do not select a target folder, a new one
= To confirm your selection will be created.
X Select Track by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm. Step 3: beginning the import
X Select Continue by turning cVd the X Select Start by turning cVd the COMAND
COMAND controller and press W to con- controller and press W to confirm.
firm. Information about the import source and
If you do not select any tracks, every track on target as well as the progress is displayed.
the CD will be imported. The Audio CD basic display automatically
appears after successful import.
Step 2: selecting the target folder
X Select Folder by turning cVd the
firm.
X To cancel importing: during importing,

confirm Cancel by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The Audio CD basic display appears.
Z
206 MUSIC REGISTER
Deleting all music files The following media are included for the
music search:
! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not
RDisc (CD/audio DVD/MP3)
use COMAND during this time.
RMemory card
This function deletes all music files from the
RMUSIC REGISTER
MUSIC REGISTER.
RUSB storage device
X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 204). X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and

(Y page 204).
X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
press W to confirm. cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Audio
X Select Delete All Music Files and The category list appears.
press W to confirm. X Select a track in a category (Y page 200).
A prompt appears. No is highlighted.
If you select Yes
Yes, all music files are deleted.
Example: opening a folder
You see the Please Wait... message.
You will then see the Data deleted mes- X Select Folder in the category list by turn-
sage. ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
If you select No
No, the process will be can- W to confirm.
celed. You see the content of the current folder.
Calling up memory space info

X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 204).
press W to confirm.
X Select Memory Info and press W to con-
firm.
The following is displayed: The name of the current folder is at the top
Rstorage capacity and the track currently playing is indicated by
Ravailable memory a # dot.
Roccupied memory X To switch to the next folder up: press the
Rcontent (folders, tracks) % back button or slide XV the
COMAND controller.
Music search Changing the folder/track name

Introduction X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 204).
The music search finds tracks via all available X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
media. The search begins with the audio
source that is currently active.
press W to confirm.
Bluetooth® audio mode 207
X Select Rename / Delete Files and press The tracks in the currently active folder or
W to confirm. the current track list are played in a random
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd. order.
X Select Options by sliding VY and press X To select options: switch to the MUSIC
W to confirm. REGISTER (Y page 204).

X Select Change and press W to confirm.
X Enter a name for the folder/track
press W to confirm.
(Y page 34).
The options list appears. The # dot indi-
X To save the changes: select ¬ and
cates the option selected.
press W to confirm.
X Select an option and press W to confirm.
Audio
The option is switched on. For all options
Deleting folders/tracks except Normal Track Sequence,
Sequence you will
X Switch to the MUSIC REGISTER see a corresponding display in the display/
(Y page 204). selection window.
i The Normal Track Sequence option is
turning cVd the COMAND controller and automatically selected when you change
press W to confirm. the disc you are currently listening to or
X Select Rename / Delete Files and press when you select a different medium. If an
W to confirm. option is selected, it remains selected after
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd. COMAND is switched on or off.
X Select Options by sliding VY and press
W to confirm. Bluetooth® audio mode
A prompt appears. No is highlighted. Preconditions for the Bluetooth®
If you select Yes
Yes, the folders/tracks are
audio device
deleted. You see the Please Wait... Bluetooth® audio mode requires a Blue-
message. You will then see the Data tooth®-capable audio device. Observe the
deleted message. information in the Bluetooth® audio device's
If you select No
No, the process will be can- operating instructions.
celed. Before using Bluetooth® audio mode, you
should check your Bluetooth® audio device
for the following:
Playback options RBluetooth® audio profile
The following options are available: The Bluetooth® audio device must support
RNormal Track Sequence the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio
The tracks are played in the normal order profiles.
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). RBluetooth® visibility
RRandom Medium
Certain Bluetooth® audio devices do not
All the tracks on the medium are played in just require activation of the Bluetooth®
random order. function. In addition, your device must be
RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only) made "visible" to other devices.
RBluetooth® device name
Z
208 Bluetooth® audio mode
This device name is predetermined but can i If you authorize a mobile phone that sup-
usually be changed. To make a clear selec- ports Bluetooth® audio, the A2DP and
tion of the Bluetooth® device possible, AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles are con-
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you cus- nected automatically.
tomize the device name. The mobile phone is then entered:
i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Rin the Bluetooth® telephone list
Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio (Y page 128)
data transmission Rin the Bluetooth® device list
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control (Y page 208).
Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a
data playback. mobile phone in Bluetooth® telephony
Audio
i Not all Bluetooth® audio devices available (Y page 128).

on the market are equally suitable. To
obtain more information about suitable Searching for and authorizing a Blue-
Bluetooth® audio devices and about con- tooth® audio device
necting Bluetooth® audio devices to
COMAND, visit
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com (USA).
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (USA) or Customer Rela-
tions at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).
X Activate Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibil-
ity on the Bluetooth® audio device.
Example: Bluetooth® device list

Preconditions in COMAND
: Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
X Activate the Bluetooth® function in tooth® audio function in range
COMAND (Y page 45). ; Bluetooth® audio player not within range
but previously authorized (symbol
appears in gray)
Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices
General information
Before using your Bluetooth® audio device
with COMAND for the first time, you will need
to authorize it.
When you authorize a new Bluetooth® audio
device, it is connected automatically. Con-
nection involves first searching for a Blue-
tooth® audio device and then authorizing it.
You can authorize up to fifteen Bluetooth®
devices. The Bluetooth® device list displays all author-
ized devices, whether they are within range
or not. After a device search, devices which the Bluetooth® audio device are the same,
are within range but not authorized are also confirm Yes by pressing W.
displayed. If you select Yes
Yes, authorization continues
X Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode and the Bluetooth® audio device is con-
(Y page 211). nected. Playback starts.
If you see the No Bluetooth Audio If you select No
No, authorization will be can-
Device Authorized message, you will celed.
need to authorize the Bluetooth® audio i The Bluetooth® audio device must sup-
device first. port Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connection
X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning via Secure Simple Pairing. COMAND cre-
cVd the COMAND controller and press ates a six-digit code, which is displayed on
W to confirm. both devices that are to be connected
Audio
X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List
by pressing W the COMAND controller. External authorization
X To search: confirm Search for BT
Audio Devices by pressing the COMAND
controller W.
COMAND searches for Bluetooth® audio
devices within range and adds them to the
Bluetooth® device list. If Bluetooth® audio
devices support the Bluetooth® audio pro-
files (A2DP, AVRCP), the devices are
detected.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within
If COMAND does not find your Bluetooth®
range and their characteristics.
audio device, this may be due to particular
X To authorize: select a Bluetooth® audio security settings on your Bluetooth® audio
device that has not yet been authorized device. In this case, check whether your Blue-
from the list (: in the example) by turning tooth® audio device can locate COMAND. The
cVd the COMAND controller. Bluetooth® device name of COMAND is MB
X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue- Bluetooth.
Bluetooth
tooth® audio device by sliding V Y the X Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode
COMAND controller and press W to con- (Y page 211).
firm. X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning
X Select Authorize and press W to confirm. cVd the COMAND controller and press
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device W to confirm.
used, you now have two options for con- X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List
tinuing with authorization. by pressing W the COMAND controller.
X Option 1: enter the passkey (Y page 128).
After successful authorization, the Blue-
tooth® audio device is connected and
starts playing.
X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the
digit codes displayed in COMAND and on
Z
X To search: confirm Connect via BT Connecting last device

Audio Device by pressing the COMAND X Confirm Connect Last Device in the
controller W. basic display by pressing W the COMAND
The duration of the search depends on the controller.
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth®
range and their characteristics. audio device, it will be connected and start
X To authorize: start the authorization on playing.
the Bluetooth® audio device, see the oper- i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
ating instructions of the Bluetooth® audio playback must first be started on the device
device. itself so that COMAND can play the audio
After successful authorization, the Blue- files.
tooth® audio device is connected and
Audio
Connecting a device from a list

starts playing.
X Select BT Audio by turning cVd the
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices, COMAND controller and press W to con-
playback must first be started on the device firm.
itself so that COMAND can play the audio X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List
files.
by pressing W the COMAND controller.
Reconnecting a Bluetooth® audio
XSelect a Bluetooth® audio device by turning
device cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth®
automatically under the following circum- audio device, it will be connected and start
stances: playing.
Rone of the last two mobile phones to have i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
been connected has also been used as a playback must be initially started on the
Bluetooth® audio player (if this function is device itself so that COMAND can play the
supported by the mobile phone). audio files.
Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic
connection itself. Bluetooth® audio device and simultane-
A Bluetooth® audio player without telephone ous search for mobile phones
functions is not automatically reconnected, During the search for mobile phones, the con-
even if it was the last device connected. nection with the Bluetooth® audio device is
If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con‐ terminated (Y page 127). In the Bluetooth®
nected message appears, you have two audio basic display, you will see the No Blue‐
options to connect a Bluetooth® audio tooth Audio Device Connected message
device: and the Connect Last Device menu item
cannot be selected.
Displaying details
X Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the
Bluetooth® device list.
X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue-
tooth® audio device by sliding V Y the
COMAND controller and press W to con- Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode

firm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm. The Bluetooth® audio basic display
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
RBluetooth® name
RBluetooth® address
Ravailability status (shown after an
update)
Rauthorization status
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
Audio
Example: Bluetooth® audio basic display

De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue-
: Track name
tooth® audio device
; Current playback settings (no symbol for
X Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the "Normal track sequence")
Bluetooth® device list. = Album name
X Select the symbol to the right of the Blue- ? Sound settings
tooth® audio device by sliding V Y the A Media list
B Artist
firm.
C To stop É or start Ì playback
D To connect a Bluetooth® audio device, to
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to de-authorize this device. increase the volume on COMAND
X Select Yes or No
E Bluetooth® audio data medium type
No.
If you select Yes
Yes, the device will be deleted F Data medium position in the media list
from the Bluetooth® device list. i If the Bluetooth® audio device connected
If you select No
No, the process will be can- supports metadata and corresponding data
celed. is available, then the artist, track and album
i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth® name can be displayed.
audio device, you should also delete the
device name MB Bluetooth from your Using the Bluetooth® audio basic dis-
Bluetooth® audio device's Bluetooth® list. play
See the Bluetooth® audio device's operat- X Connect Bluetooth® audio devices
ing instructions.
(Y page 208)
or
X Reconnect the Bluetooth® audio device
(Y page 210).
COMAND activates the Bluetooth® audio
device. The basic display appears and the
device starts playing.
Z
Using the function button Restarting playback after stopping

X Press the h function button one or more
times.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
following order:
RCD/audio DVD/MP3 (disc)
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
Audio

During the search for mobile phones , the
connection with the Bluetooth® audio device
is terminated (Y page 127). In the Blue-
Using the media list
tooth® audio basic display (Y page 211), you
X Select Bluetooth Audio in the media list will see the No Bluetooth Audio Device
by turning cVd the COMAND controller Connected message and the Connect Last
and press W to confirm (Y page 193). Device menu item cannot be selected.
COMAND activates the connected device. When the search is finished, the Bluetooth®
You will see a message to this effect. The audio device can be reconnected.
basic display then appears. X Confirm Connect Last Device by press-
ing W.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device
Starting/stopping playback used, playback starts immediately or you
X To start playback: select Ì by sliding must start playback manually.
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con- In this case, you will see the Bluetooth
troller and press W to confirm. Audio Device Paused message.
Playback starts. É is selected.
X To stop playback: select É by turning
W to confirm.
A message appears. Ì is selected.
X To continue playback: select Ì by
press W to confirm.
A message appears. É is selected.
X To start playback: select Ì by turning

W to confirm.
Playback resumes from the beginning.
Operation with the Media Interface 213
Selecting a track Increasing the volume on COMAND

The function is not supported by all Blue-
tooth® audio devices.
X To skip forward or back to a track: press
the E or F button on COMAND.
or
X Press the 9 or : button briefly on
X Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
or : button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel until the desired track is reached.
Audio
If you press and hold the 9 or : but- X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning
ton, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Volume and press W to confirm.
Selecting playback options A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
If the Bluetooth® audio device supports the
X Select Standard or Boost and press W to
corresponding function, the following options
are available: confirm.
RNormal Track Sequence Information about sound settings
The tracks are played in the normal order (Y page 30)
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). You will find further information in the "Audio
Audio data playback is determined by the AUX mode" section (Y page 220)
order in which the tracks are written to the
data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder Operation with the Media Interface
have been played, the tracks in the next Connection options
folder are played.
RRandom Tracks Overview
All the tracks on the medium are played in You will find the connection sockets in the
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). center console stowage compartment.
X Select BT Audio by sliding VÆ and turning Device-specific adapter cables are required
cVd the COMAND controller and press to connect external devices to the Media
W to confirm. Interface. Country-specific versions are sup-
The # dot indicates the option selected. plied with the Media Interface (Y page 214).
X Select the option by turning cVd the You can connect the following data carriers
COMAND controller and press W to con- to COMAND via the Media Interface:
firm. RiPod®
If you select Random Tracks,
Tracks you will see RiPhone®
a corresponding symbol in the display/ Rcertain MP3 players
selection window.
i Store individual parts in a safe place.
Z
214 Operation with the Media Interface
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connec-

tion cables.
i iPod® and iPhone® are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California,
USA.
i MP3 players that support MTP (Media
Transfer Protocol) can be used.
This allows the MP3 player to be easily con-
nected to the Media Interface and removed
after use. Audio data is played without
: Four-pin socket for ⅛ inch stereo jack,
problem.
e.g. for MP3 players (audio and video)
Audio
On some MP3 players, you have to activate ; iPod® plug for connecting an iPod®
the relevant function; see the MP3 player
operating instructions. = USB socket for connecting an MP3 player
? Example of device: iPod®
Supported devices X Connect the external device with suitable
For details and a list of supported devices, socket :, ; or =.
visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or COMAND activates the device, a display
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance appears (when connecting an iPod® plug or
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes USB socket).
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer If you remove a device, the No Device Con‐
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada). nected message appears.
i A connected iPod® or MP3 player should
Connecting an external device not be simultaneously operated via the
Media Interface and the remote control
Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. (e.g. Bluetooth® remote control) or directly
They may malfunction in extreme tempera- via the device itself. This may cause unfore-
tures; see the operating instructions for the seen technical difficulties.
respective device. Examples of extreme tem-
peratures are direct sunlight or very low out- Applications (Apps) that are activated on
side temperatures. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC the connected device may lead to malfunc-
accepts no liability for damage to external tions.
devices. i Connecting a fully discharged iPod® or
i Never connect more than one device at a MP3 player can result in an extended initi-
time. You will otherwise not be able to play alization period.
back from the external device. Malfunction messages appear while the
USB hubs (devices with several USB con- device is being activated if:
nections) are not supported. Rthe connected device is not supported
(External
External Device Unavailable mes-
sage).
Rthe connected device consumes too much
power.
Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty. By pressing the function button repeatedly,
Ra mass storage device (e.g. a USB memory you can change the operating mode in the
stick or USB hard drive) is connected to the following order:
Media Interface. RCD/audio DVD/MP3 (disc)
In this case the Please connect the RMemory card mode
device to the other USB port mes- RMUSIC REGISTER
sage appears. RUSB storage device
i The separate USB connection ensures RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
quick access and expanded media content RBluetooth® audio mode
options.
i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Switching on using a number key
Audio
Center if you have further questions.
X Press the i number key (for a DVD
Disconnecting an iPod® changer) or the o number key (for a
X Press the release buttons on iPod® single DVD drive).
plug ; and pull the iPod® cable from the This selects the connected external audio
iPod®, see the separate cable kit instruc- device directly.
tions.
Switching on via the media list
Switching to Media Interface mode

General notes
In extreme cases, starting up individual func-
tions can take up to several minutes – this
depends on the external device and its con-
tent (e.g. video podcasts).
Only use the original software to save files on
iPods® or MP3 players. Otherwise, some or
all functions may not be available.
Media Interface mode (iPod® mode) when equip-
ped with a DVD changer
Switching on automatically : Cover (if available) or representation of
X Connect an external device (Y page 214). device
COMAND activates the device (if con- ; Track number
nected via the iPod® connector or USB = Elapsed track time (also in format
socket). The basic display then appears. 00:00:00 for audio books)
? Track name
Switching modes using the function A Graphic time display
button B Track position in playlist
The external device is connected to the Media C Album name (if available)
Interface. D Artist (if available)
X Press the h function button one or more
E Music search
times. F Position in the media list
Z
G Type of data medium the previous track. If you have selected a

H Playback options playback option other than Normal Track
Sequence, the track sequence is random.
Sequence
X Select the entry under position 0 (DVD
changer) or position 5 (single DVD drive) in
Selecting using the number keypad
the media list by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm X To make an entry: press the l button.
(Y page 193). An input menu appears. The number of
COMAND activates the connected device. characters available for input depends on
You will see a message to this effect. The the number of stored tracks.
basic display then appears. X To enter a track number: press a number
If no device is connected, you will see the key, e.g. q.
Audio
Media Interface entry instead of a The digit is entered in the first position in
device name. the input line.
The type of device connected is indicated by i COMAND will ignore and not display an
the corresponding symbol for iPod® invalid digit.
(iPhone®) or MP3 player. X Enter more numbers if desired.
The current playback option is shown with a The track plays after the last possible num-
symbol after the album name (no display for ber is entered.
Normal Track Sequence)
Sequence (Y page 219). i Pressing and holding a number key for
i If the device connected does not contain more than two seconds completes the
any playable tracks, a message appears to entry, and the corresponding track is
this effect. played.
Selecting music files X While the display/selection window is
Note active, slide X V Y and hold the COMAND
controller until the desired position has
COMAND displays the data stored on the been reached.
iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player according to
or
the file structure used in the respective
medium.
XPress and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
Selecting by skipping to a track i On an iPod® or iPhone®, fast rewind only
functions within the current track.
X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the dis-
play/selection window is active. Selecting a category/playlist/folder
or
Overview
The skip forward function skips to the next For an iPod®, iPhone® or certain MP3 players,
track. The skip back function skips to the you can select tracks using categories or fold-
beginning of the current track if the track ers.
has been playing for more than eight sec-
onds. If the track has been playing for less
than eight seconds, it skips to the start of
Depending on the device connected, the fol- Calling up a category list

lowing categories may be available, for exam-
ple:
RCurrent Tracklist
RSelect By Cover
RKeyword Search
RPlaylists (e.g. All
All)
RArtists
RAlbums
RTracks
RPodcasts
Audio
RGenres
RComposers
RAudiobooks
RVideos (except for Hong Kong)
i Some playback categories contain the

entry All
All. If this entry has been selected,
the entire content of the category selected
will be played.
The Videos category is available for
iPods® and iPhones® (except for Hong Example: category list
Kong). X Select Search in the basic display by slid-
i The functions are available as soon as the ing VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
entire media content has been read and controller and press W to confirm.
analyzed. For certain functions, such as The category list appears.
keyword search and selection by cover, this
can take several minutes, depending on the i Search is not available until the device
scope of media and the connected device. has been activated.
If the same device is reconnected with i Reading: if the media content of the con-
unchanged media content, these functions nected device is being read, this is indi-
are available much more quickly. cated on the upper right by a symbol. When
However, if you change the media content, reading has ended, the categories Select
it has to be read and analyzed again. By Cover and Keyword Search are avail-
able.
Depending on the connected device and
the size of the media content, reading may
take several minutes. When the device is
next started or reconnected, the advanced
functions will be quickly available.
However, if you change the media content
on your iPod®/iPhone®, it has to be read
and analyzed again.
Z
This function is available for alphabetically

sorted categories and folders. This function
is not available for albums or playlists, for
example.
X Select a category, e.g. Artists
Artists, by turning
W to confirm.
The available artists are displayed.
XPress the corresponding number key once
or repeatedly to select the initial letter of
Example: current track list the desired artist. For example, to select an
: Symbol for next folder up artist whose name begins with C, press the
Audio
; Device icon and device name l number key three times.

= Track symbol The available letters are listed at the lower
edge of the display.
? Current title
After a message, the first entry in the list
X Select Current Tracklist by turning which matches the letter entered is high-
cVd the COMAND controller and press lighted.
W to confirm. i If no corresponding entry exists, the last
The content of the current track list entry corresponding to a previous letter is
appears. highlighted instead.
X Select the track by turning c V d the
i iPods and MP3 players: the quality of the
search results is highly dependent on the
firm.
version and language variant of the soft-
The track is played.
ware used to populate the device. A well-
X To switch to the next folder up: slide known example of such software is
XV the COMAND controller. iTunes®.
or If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in
X Press the k back button. iTunes®), the search is canceled without
any result.
Playing back the content of a category
or folder Additional selection functions
RSelect By Cover
X Select the category or folder by turning
c V d the COMAND controller. Albums can be chosen by cover using the
X Press W the COMAND controller for longer
menu item.
than 2 seconds. The first time the Select by cover func-
The content of the category or folder tion is used, additional data must be loaded
selected is played in accordance with the from the iPod®/iPhone®. The current
playback option selected (Y page 219). music playback is interrupted to allow
access to this data. The process may take
a few minutes and should not be canceled.
Alphabetical track selection
Otherwise it will start again from the begin-
iPod®, iPhone® and MP3 player ning the next time Select By Cover is
selected. Covers are initially searched for
in the Gracenote Media Database and are All the tracks on the medium are played in
then added to during playback from the random order.
connected device (Y page 196). The avail- RRandom Track List
ability depends on the use and the tracks The tracks in the currently active category
already selected. or folder, including any subfolders, are
RKeyword Search played in random order.
Selecting keyword search allows you to
i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not
search through all categories on the con-
functioning or paused, the playback
nected device for keywords.
options are inactive. The display of options
i More information on Select By Cover is grayed out.
and Keyword Search can be found under
"Music search, selecting category"
Audio
(Y page 216). MP3 player instructions
i For an iPod®/iPhone®, the available cov- General information
ers are added most efficiently if the entire
media content is in the current playlist. This Up to 30,000 tracks per medium are sup-
is the case if you have selected the play- ported.
back option Tracks or Random Medium You can speed up some functions and
(Y page 219). improve the search results by:
Rmaking sure the names of tracks, albums
Special feature in iPod®/iPhone® mode and artists, for example, are written the
same way
i If the connected iPod®/iPhone® is not
Rlabeling albums featuring various artists as
functioning or paused, you can search for
tracks but cannot select them. After con- "compilations"
firming a new track, the Function i Multiple entries of tracks in playlists are
Unavailable message appears. filtered out for some players.
Data formats
Playback options
MP3 and WMA are supported as data formats
X To select a playback option: select with fixed and variable bit rates (up to
Media Interface in the basic display by 320 kbits/s).
sliding V Æ and turning c V d the
COMAND controller and press W to con- Special considerations when using MP3
firm. players
cates the option selected. Up to eight directory levels with up to 1,000
tracks per directory are supported.
X Select an option and press W to confirm. Do not use USB extension leads or adapters.
The following options are available: They can impair functionality.
RNormal Track Sequence i DRM (Digital Rights Management) pro-
Normal track sequence: you hear the tected files are not supported by the Media
tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical Interface.
or alphabetical).
RRandom Medium
Z
220 Audio AUX mode
Audio AUX mode RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode

Notes on audio AUX mode
External audio sources may have different Switching modes via the audio menu
volumes, which can mean that system mes-
sages such as traffic announcements and When you connect an external audio source,
navigation system announcements are much audio AUX is not selected automatically.
louder. If necessary, deactivate the system X Select Audio in the main function bar by
messages or adjust their volume manually. sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
You can connect an external audio source controller and press W to confirm.
(AUX) to COMAND. If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it
Depending on the vehicle model series the will now be active.
Audio
connection is made via a jack in the storage If another audio source is switched on, you
compartment in the center console or via the can now switch to audio AUX mode in the
USB port (Y page 191). audio menu.
If COMAND is equipped with the Media Inter- X Select Audio using ZV and press W to
face, external audio sources are connected confirm.
using the cable set provided. An AUX socket The audio menu appears.
is not provided. The connections for the X Select Aux by turning cVd and press W to
Media Interface are located in the stowage
confirm.
compartment in the center console.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium
i You will find further information online at in the external audio source is played if the
http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call source is connected and playback
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance selected.
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Cus-
tomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for
Canada).
Switching to audio AUX mode

button
The external device is connected to the audio
AUX in. Please see the respective operating instruc-
X Press the h function button one or more tions for how to operate the external audio
times. source.
By pressing the function button repeatedly, Information on:
you can change the operating mode in the RVolume settings (Y page 29)
following order: RSound settings (Y page 30)
RCD/audio DVD/MP3 (disc)
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
Audio AUX mode 221
Increasing the volume on COMAND
Audio
X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning
W to confirm.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
X Select Standard or Boost and press W to
confirm.
Standard: the volume of the external audio
Standard
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external audio
Boost
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
A device which is connected as an external
audio source may seem quieter or louder in
the vehicle, or the usual maximum volume
cannot be achieved. On some devices, it is
possible to adjust the volume separately. In
this case, start at a medium volume and
increase it gradually. This enables you to
determine whether the system is able to play
the music at high volume without distorting
it.
Z
222
223

General information ......................... 224
Basic settings .................................... 224
Video DVD mode ............................... 224
AUX video mode ................................ 230
Picture viewer ................................... 231
Video
224 Video DVD mode
Your COMAND equipment X Select Brightness

Brightness, Contrast or Color by
These operating instructions describe all the press W to confirm.
standard and optional equipment for your X Set the value between - 5 and + 5 and press
COMAND system, as available at the time of W to confirm.
COMAND system may not be equipped with Changing the picture format
The menu is shown.
General information X Select DVD-Video by sliding VÆ and turn-
Automatic picture shutoff ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The video image is only displayed for the A menu appears.
Video
driver when the transmission lever is in posi-

tion P. X Select 16:9 Optimized,
Optimized 4:3 or Wide‐
screen and press W to confirm.
SPLITVIEW allows the front passenger to view
the video image (Y page 38). The dot in front of the entry indicates the
currently selected format.
When the transmission lever is disengaged
from position P, the following message X Select a setting by turning cVd the
appears in the display: In order not to COMAND controller and press W to con-
distract you from the traffic situa‐ firm.
tion, the picture is faded out while
the vehicle is in motion.
As soon as the selector lever of the transmis- Video DVD mode
sion is returned to position P, the video image
is shown. Important safety notes
G WARNING
Basic settings If you open the CD/DVD drive housing, you
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or could be exposed to invisible laser radiation.
color This laser radiation could damage your retina.
X In video DVD or video AUX mode, press the
W COMAND Controller.
The menu is shown. fied specialist workshop.
X Select DVD-Video or Aux by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to G WARNING
confirm. Handling discs while driving may distract you
A menu appears. from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Video DVD mode 225
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph i If you insert a video DVD with a different
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is cov- region code, you will see a message to this
ering a distance of 44 feet (approximately effect.
14 m) every second.
i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the
factory. This setting can be changed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This will
Notes on discs
allow you to play video DVDs with a differ-
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. ent region code, provided that they are pro-
They could peel off and damage COMAND. duced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC
Stickers can cause the disc to bend, which standard. The region code can be changed
can result in read errors and disc recogni- up to five times.
tion problems.
! COMAND is designed to play discs that
comply with the EN 60908 standard. There-
Video
fore, you can only use discs with a maxi- Depending on the DVD, it is possible that cer-
mum thickness of 1.3 mm. tain functions or actions will be temporarily
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that blocked or may not function at all. As soon as
contain data on both sides (DVD on one you try to activate these functions or actions,
side and audio data on the other), they can- you will see the K symbol in the display.
not be ejected and can damage the device.
Only use round discs with a diameter of
12 cm. Do not use discs with a diameter of Inserting and removing DVDs
8 cm, even with an adapter. X Proceed as described in the "Inserting and
Playback problems may occur when playing ejecting CDs and DVDs" section
copied discs. There are a large variety of (Y page 188).
discs, DVD authoring software, writing soft-
ware and writers available. This variety means
that there is no guarantee that the system will Switching to video DVD mode
be able to play discs that you have copied
yourself. Switching on automatically
X Single DVD drive: insert a video DVD.
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
DVD playback conditions starts to play it.
If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or X DVD changer: insert a video DVD.
PAL TV standards, they may create picture, X Press h.
sound or other problems during playback.
or
COMAND is capable of playing back video
DVDs produced according to the following
standards: COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
RRegion code 1 or region code 0 (no region
code)
RPAL or NTSC standard
You will generally find the relevant details

either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
Z
226 Video DVD mode

button
X Press the h function button.
COMAND switches to the previous disc
operating mode.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
following order:
RVideo DVD/CD/audio DVD/MP3 in the
DVD changer or DVD single drive (disc
Control menu displayed
mode)
: Type of data medium
RMemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
; Current title
= Current scene
Video
RUSB storage device

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode ? Track time
RBluetooth® audio mode A Shows the menu
X DVD changer: select Media by sliding i This function is not available while the
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND con- DVD's own menu is being displayed.
Single DVD drive: select Media by sliding
troller and press W to confirm. X To show: in full-screen DVD video mode,
X Select a ý video DVD from the media list press W the COMAND controller.
(Y page 228). or
X Select Menu while the control menu is
Switching on with the video menu shown and press W to confirm.
X Select Video in the main function bar by X To hide: slide the ZV COMAND controller
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND and confirm Full Screen by pressing W.
Video DVD mode is switched on.
Showing/hiding the control menu

X To show: in DVD video mode, slide ZVÆ
X To hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND control-
ler.
or
Menu shown
X Wait for approximately eight seconds.
: Video DVD options
; Pause function
= Stop function
Video DVD mode 227
? Media selection Pause function

A Sound settings X Show the menu (Y page 226).
i This function is not available while the X To pause playback: select Ë by turn-
DVD's own menu is being displayed. ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
Fast forwarding/rewinding X To continue playback: select Ì and
X In full-screen DVD video mode, slide XVY press W to confirm.
and hold the COMAND controller until the The menu is hidden.
desired position is reached.
or
X Press and hold the E or F button Selecting a scene/chapter
until the desired position is reached. If the film is divided into scenes or chapters,
Video
You see the control menu. you can select them directly while the film is
running, or skip forwards step by step. Some
DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g.
Stop function during the opening credits).
X Show the menu (Y page 226). It may also be possible to select the scene/
chapter from within the menu stored on the
X To interrupt playback: select É by
DVD.
X To skip forwards or back: in full screen
press W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The mode, turn cVd the COMAND controller.
video image is hidden. or
X To continue playback: select Ì and X Slide XVY the COMAND controller.
press W to confirm. or
Playback continues from the point where it X Press the E or F button on the
was interrupted. control panel.
X To stop playback: while playback is inter- The navigation menu (Y page 226) appears
rupted, select É again and press W to for approximately eight seconds.
confirm.
or
Selecting a film/title
X During playback, confirm É by pressing
W twice in rapid succession.
Ì is selected.
X To restart playback: confirm Ì by
pressing W.
Playback restarts from the beginning.
DVD function menu
Z
228 Video DVD mode
This function is only available if the DVD is DVD menu

divided into several films/titles. If the DVD
contains several films, these can be selected Calling up the DVD menu
directly. A film can be selected either when The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
the DVD is being played back or when it is itself. It is structured in various ways accord-
stopped. ing to the individual DVD and permits certain
The film can also be selected from the menu actions and settings.
on the DVD itself. In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam-
X Show the menu (Y page 226). ple, you can change the DVD language in the
X Select DVD-Video by turning cVd the DVD menu.
COMAND controller and press W to con- X Show the menu (Y page 226).
firm. X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
X Select DVD Functions and press W to cVd the COMAND controller and press
confirm. W to confirm.
Video
A menu appears. X Select DVD Functions and press W to

X Select Title Selection by turning cVd confirm.
the COMAND controller and press W to X Select Menu and press W to confirm.
confirm. The DVD menu appears.
X Select a film/title and press W to confirm.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
Selecting a video DVD from the media

list
X Show the menu (Y page 226).
X Select Media by sliding VÆ and turning
W to confirm.
The media list appears. The # dot indicates
the current medium being played. Video
DVDs are indicated by the ý icon.
X Equipped with a DVD changer: press W X Show the DVD menu (Y page 228).
the COMAND controller to display all mag- X Select a menu item by sliding ZVÆ the
azine trays. COMAND controller and press W to con-
X Select a video DVD by turning cVd the firm.
COMAND controller and press W to con- or
firm. X Select a menu item by sliding XVY the
COMAND loads the video DVD and begins
playing it.
firm.
i If you select a CD, an audio DVD or an The menu appears.
MP3 medium, you switch to the respective X To reconfirm your selection: confirm
audio mode. Select by pressing W.
Further information on the media list COMAND carries out the action.
(Y page 193).
Video DVD mode 229
Make a selection from the further options, X Show the DVD menu (Y page 228).
if necessary. X In full-screen mode, press W the COMAND
COMAND then switches back to the DVD controller to show the menu.
menu. X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
i Menu items which cannot be selected are cVd the COMAND controller and press
shown in gray. W to confirm.
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: X Select DVD Functions and press W to
Back (to the movie)
movie), Play
Play, Stop
Stop, K, confirm.
L or Go up may either not function at X Select Menu Language or Audio Lan‐
all or may not function at certain points in guage and press W to confirm.
the DVD menu. To indicate this, the K In both cases, a menu appears after a few
symbol appears in the display. seconds. The # dot in front of an entry indi-
cates the currently selected language.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu X Select a setting by turning cVd the
Video
X Show the DVD menu (Y page 228). COMAND controller and press W to con-
X Select the corresponding menu item in the firm.
DVD menu and press W the COMAND con-
troller to confirm.
or Subtitles and camera angle
X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and These functions are not available on all DVDs.
press W the COMAND controller to con- The number of subtitle languages and camera
firm. angles available depends on the content of
X Select Go Up and press W to confirm. the DVD. It may also be possible to access
the settings from the DVD menu.
X Show the DVD menu (Y page 228).
Back to the movie
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
X Press the k back button repeatedly cVd the COMAND controller and press
until you see the movie. W to confirm.
or X Select DVD Functions and press W to
X Select the corresponding menu item from confirm.
the DVD menu. X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and
X Select the Back (to movie) menu item in press W to confirm.
the menu and press W to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears. The # dot
in front of an entry indicates the current
setting.
Setting the language and audio for- X Select a setting by turning cVd the
mat COMAND controller and press W to con-
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it firm.
is available, you can set the DVD menu lan-
guage, the audio language or the audio for-
mat. The number of settings is determined by Interactive content
the DVD content. It is possible that the set-
DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a
tings may also be accessed in the DVD menu
video game). In a video game, for example,
(Y page 228).
Z
230 AUX video mode
you may be able to influence events by select- X Press the h function button repeatedly
ing and triggering actions. The type and num- until Media Interface mode is selected.
ber of actions depend on the DVD. or
X Select an action by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the X Select Video in the main function bar by
COMAND controller and press W to exe- turning c V d the COMAND controller and
cute it. press W to confirm.
A menu appears and the first entry, If AUX video mode was the last mode
Select, is highlighted.
Select selected, it will now be active.
X Press W the COMAND controller. If another video source is switched on, you
can now switch to AUX video mode in the
video menu.
AUX video mode X Select Video and press W to confirm.
X Select Aux and press W to confirm.
Connecting external video sources
The AUX video menu appears. You will hear
Video
External video sources may have different and see the content of the external video
volumes, which can mean that system mes- source if it is connected and switched to
sages such as traffic announcements and playback.
navigation system announcements are much
louder. If necessary, deactivate the system
messages or adjust their volume manually.
If your vehicle is equipped with Media Inter-
face, you can connect an external video X To show: in video AUX mode, press W the
source (AUX video) (Y page 213). COMAND controller.
The 1/8 inch audio/video jacks are in the X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
center console stowage compartment. and confirm Full Screen by pressing W.
i In vehicles with a rear view camera, the
AUX video jack cannot be used for external
video sources. Volume and sound settings
Information on:
RVolume settings (Y page 29)
Switching to AUX video mode
RSound settings (Y page 30)
i A device which is connected as an exter-
nal video source may seem quieter or
louder in the vehicle, or the usual maximum
volume cannot be achieved. On some devi-
ces, it is possible to adjust the volume sep-
arately. In this case, start at a medium vol-
ume and increase it gradually. This enables
you to determine whether the system is
able to play the sound at high volume with-
out distorting it.
AUX video mode
Picture viewer 231
Increasing the volume on COMAND Displaying pictures

X Show the video AUX menu (Y page 230). X Select (Y page 200) Photos in the category
X Select Volume by turning cVd the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller
COMAND controller and press W to con- and press W to confirm.
firm. A folder directory appears.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the X Select a folder with photos and press W to
current setting. confirm.
X Select Standard or Boost and press W to The folder displays the existing picture files
confirm. (example).
Standard: the volume of the external video
Standard
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external video
Boost
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
Video
Picture viewer
Introduction
If there are pictures on the active data
medium, you can look at them. You can dis-
play pictures with a resolution of up to 20 X Select a photo and press W to confirm.
megapixels. The photo is displayed and the music is
stopped.
Data medium Supported picture
formats
CD/DVD with pic- bmp, jpeg, jpg, png
ture files
USB devices (sticks, bmp, jpeg, jpg, png
hard drives)
SD memory card
Calling up a category list

X Select a data medium with pictures (e.g. a
memory card):
Rin the Audio menu (Y page 178)
Rin the media list (Y page 193)
X Select Search in the basic display by slid-

ing VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
The category list appears (Y page 200).
Z
232 Picture viewer
Changing the picture view
X While viewing a picture (Y page 231), press

Video
A menu appears.
X To turn the picture clockwise: confirm
Turn Clockwise by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
X To turn the picture counter-clockwise:
select Turn Counterclockwise by turn-
W to confirm.
X To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by
turning the cVd COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X Slide ZVÆ and XVY the COMAND control-
ler.
X To revert to the original size: press W the
COMAND controller.
or
X Press the k button.
Exiting the picture viewer

X Select Back To Menu in the menu by turn-
W to confirm.
233

Overview ............................................ 234
Basic functions ................................. 240
Rear Seat Entertainment System

System settings ................................ 241
CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode ........ 242
Video DVD mode ............................... 246
Operation with an active COMAND
source ................................................ 250
AUX mode .......................................... 252
234 Overview
Your COMAND equipment RAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display)

and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive)
These operating instructions describe all the Rtwo sets of cordless headphones
COMAND system, as available at the time of

Overview
Important safety notes
G WARNING
G WARNING
If objects such as headphones/headsets or
external audio/video sources are not secured
in the passenger compartment, they can be
flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, for example in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc-
tion.
Always stow these items or similar objects
carefully so that they cannot be flung around,
for example in a lockable vehicle stowage
compartment.
Components
The Rear Seat Entertainment System
includes:
Rtwo screens for the rear behind the front-
seat head restraints
Rtwo remote controls
Ra CD/DVD drive
Overview 235
Rear-compartment screens

: AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 236).
; Display
Remote control i Two remote controls are supplied for the

US and Canadian markets.
Overview
Selecting the screen for the remote
control
The remote control can be used to operate
one of the two rear-compartment screens or
SPLITVIEW for the front passenger. To do so,
you must switch the remote control to the
desired screen (Y page 235).
X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumb-
wheel = until "L REAR" is highlighted in the
window.
X To select the right-hand screen: turn
thumbwheel = until "R REAR" is high-
lighted in the window.
X To select SPLITVIEW: turn thumbwheel =
until "SPLITVIEW" is highlighted in the win-
: Switches the screen on/off dow.
; Switches the button lighting on/off
= Selects the screen for the remote control Switching the screen on/off
? Selects a menu or menu item
If the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the
A Confirms a selection or setting ignition lock (see the vehicle Operator's Man-
B Switches the sound on or off ual), or the SmartKey is not inserted, the
C Adjusts the volume screens in the rear will switch off after 30
D Skips to a track, fast-forward/fast-rewind minutes. Before the screens switch off, they
show a message to this effect.
E Selects a track; direct entry
You can switch the screens back on. How-
F Exits a menu (back)
ever, this will discharge the starter battery.
Z
236 Overview
X Point the remote control at the rear-com- CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks
partment screen which has been selected
for remote operation.
X Press button : on the remote control
(Y page 235).
The respective rear-compartment screen
switches on or off.
i You can only switch the screens on using
the remote control if the ignition is
switched on.
Switching the button lighting on/off

: CD/DVD slot
X Press button ; on the remote control
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(Y page 235). (red)
Depending on the previous status, the but-
= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
ton lighting is switched on or off.
(white)
i If you do not use the remote control for ? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
about 15 seconds, the button lighting A CD/DVD eject button
switches off automatically.
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
Switching the sound on or off
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX
X Press button B on the remote control display) (Y page 235).
(Y page 235).
The sound is switched on/off.
Selecting a menu/menu item and con-

firming your selection
X Select a menu/menu item using the
=;9: buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
confirm.
Overview 237
Cordless headphones
Overview

: Volume control
; Selects a screen for the headphones
= Battery compartment cover
? Switches the cordless headphones on/off
A Indicator lamp with various displays (Y page 238)
X Open both sides of the headphones and adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling the
headphone band in the direction of the arrow.
Switching the cordless headphones X Press button :.

on/off Depending on the previous status, the
headphones are switched on or off. To save
the battery, the headphones are switched
off automatically if they do not receive an
audio signal within three minutes.
Z
238 Overview
Adjusting the volume of the head- Indicator lamp displays

phones
The color of the indicator lamp shows
whether the headphones are switched on or
off and indicates the charge level of the bat-

teries inserted.
LED dis- Status
play
Green The batteries are fine.
Red The batteries are almost dis-
charged.
Lit contin- The headphones are switched
uously on and connected to a screen.
Flashing The headphones are search-
ing for the connection to a
screen.
XTurn volume control : until the desired Off (dark) The headphones are switched
volume has been set. off or the batteries are dis-
i If you have connected cordless head- charged.
phones to a rear-compartment screen, you
can adjust the volume using the remote Connecting additional headphones
control (Y page 235).
You can connect one additional set of corded
Selecting a screen for the headphones headphones to each of the two rear screens
(Y page 235). The socket is designed for
headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug
and an impedance of 32 ohms.
Replacing batteries
Notes
G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
X Move push slider : to L (left-hand screen)
or R (right-hand screen). H Environmental note
Dispose of discharged batteries in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner.
Overview 239
Batteries are required for the remote control ing with retaining lugs ? into the battery
and for the two sets of cordless headphones. compartment and allow catch tab ; to
The batteries can be replaced (Y page 238). engage in place.

On the remote control On the cordless headphones
: Battery compartment cover

The cordless headphones contain two type
AAA, 1.5 V batteries.
X To open the battery compartment: flip
: Battery compartment battery compartment cover : upwards.
; Catch tab As you do so, hold the left-hand side of the
= Battery compartment cover
headphones as shown to prevent the bat-
teries from falling out.
? Retaining lugs
X Remove the discharged batteries from the
A Batteries tray.
The remote control contains 2 type AAA, X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar-
1.5 V batteries. ity markings on the batteries and battery
X To open the battery compartment: compartment when doing so.
remove battery compartment cover = on Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
the back of the remote control. must face upwards.
X To do so, press down retaining lug ; and Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
take off battery compartment cover =. must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
X Remove discharged batteries A from the
press battery compartment cover down-
tray. wards until it engages into place.
X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polar- If the batteries have been inserted cor-
ity markings on the batteries and battery rectly, the indicator lamp will light up green
compartment when doing so. when the headphones are switched on.
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)
must face upwards. i The operating duration of the headphones
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.
must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
insert battery compartment cover = start-
Z
240 Basic functions
Basic functions Multiple users

Using headphones Simultaneous use of the rear-compart-
You can use the cordless headphones sup-
ment disc drive
plied and/or up to two sets of corded head- The two rear-compartment screens can be
phones connected to the corresponding jack operated almost entirely independently from
of the rear-compartment screens one another. However, there can be a conflict
(Y page 235). in some menus if the two screens are used
Information on the cordless headphones simultaneously.
(Y page 237). If the rear-compartment disc drive is being
used for both screens simultaneously, select-
ing certain menus or settings on one of the
Using the main loudspeakers screens also affects the other screen.
This function is available in conjunction with The following functions affect both screens:
COMAND. Rchanging playback options
You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to lis- Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder)
ten to a disc inserted in the rear-compartment Rusing the play, pause and stop functions
drive. To do so, at least one of the rear-com- Rfast forwarding/rewinding or scrolling
partment screens must be set to disc mode.
Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating
X To set on COMAND: press the $ func-
within it
tion button to switch on an audio mode. Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
angle
controller and press W to confirm. Rcalling up interactive DVD content
The Audio menu appears.
The following functions affect only one
X Select Rear by turning cVd the COMAND
screen:
Raudio and video functions as well as picture
i The headphones' volume setting does not settings
affect the main loudspeakers. Rswitching between full screen and the
menu
Selecting sound settings Switching between operating modes

You can select the sound settings in the CD/ When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio
audio DVD/MP3, video DVD and AUX modes. CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you
X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio call up this operating mode again later, there
CD mode) (Y page 242). are two possibilities:
X Select Treble or Bass using Rthe operating mode has been changed on
the :=; buttons on the remote the other screen.
control and press the 9 button to confirm. Rthe operating mode has not been changed.
An adjustment scale appears. In the first case, the operating mode appears
X Select a setting using the 9: but- as it is on the other screen.
tons and press the 9 button to confirm. In the second case, the setting appears on the
screen as it was when you last exited the
operating mode.
System settings 241
Picture settings Changing the picture format

Overview X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
You can select picture settings in video DVD

or
and AUX mode (Y page 252).
X While the navigation menu is shown,
Adjusting the brightness, contrast and (Y page 226) select Menu and press the
color 9 button to confirm.
X Select DVD-Video using
the :=; buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
The dot in front of one of the menu items
16:9 Optimized
Optimized, 4:3 or Widescreen indi-
cates the format currently selected.
X Select a format using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
System settings
Example: TV mode
: Brightness, contrast and color Note
; Picture formats You can adjust almost all system settings
X Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 246). individually for each screen without affecting
the other screen. You make these settings
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
using the remote control (Y page 235).
or
X While the navigation menu is shown, Selecting the display language
(Y page 226) select Menu and press the
X Select System using the 9=;
buttons on the remote control and press
X Select DVD-Video using 9 to confirm.
the :=; buttons and press the You see the system menu on the selected
9 button to confirm. rear screen.
X Select Brightness
Brightness, Contrast or Color X Select Settings using the : button
using the 9: buttons and press the and press 9 to confirm.
9 button to confirm. X Select Language using the 9: but-
An adjustment scale appears. tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select a setting using the 9: but- The list of languages appears. A # dot
tons and press the 9 button to confirm. indicates the current setting.
X Select a language using the 9: but-
The Rear Seat Entertainment System acti-
vates the selected language.
Z
Switching the display design CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode

X Select Settings using the : button Important safety notes
and press 9 to confirm.
X Select Day Mode,

G WARNING
Mode Night Mode or Auto‐
matic using the 9: buttons and The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
press the 9 button to confirm.
The dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation There is a risk of injury.
Day Mode The display is set per- tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
manently to day fied specialist workshop.
design.
Night Mode The display is set per-
manently to night General notes
design. You will find information on the following top-
Automatic The display design ics in the Audio section:
changes depending on Rnotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 200)
the vehicle instrument Rnotes on MP3 mode (Y page 198)
cluster illumination. Rnotes on copyright (Y page 200)
Setting the brightness Inserting a CD/DVD

X Select Settings using the : button
and press 9 to confirm.
X Select Brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
A scale appears.
X Adjust the brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The brightness bar moves up or down. The
picture becomes lighter or darker in
accordance with the scale.
: Disc slot
; Disc eject button
Showing/hiding the picture
Depending on the vehicle model and equip-
X To hide the picture: select Display Off ment level, the CD/DVD drive is found:
in the system menu using the :; Rbehind the center console in a folding com-
buttons on the remote control and press partment, or
the 9 button to confirm. Runder the rear bench seat, or
The picture is hidden.
Rin the stowage box between the rear seats
X To display the picture: press the 9 but-
ton.
The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If Selecting a track

there is already a disc inserted, this must be
ejected before another is inserted. Selecting by skipping to a track
To skip forwards or backwards to a

X Insert a disc into the disc slot. X
The printed side of the disc must face track: press the = or ; button on
upwards. If neither side of the disc is the remote control.
printed, the side you wish to play must face or
downwards. X Press the E or F button.
The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc. The skip forward function skips to the next
The CD/DVD drive plays the disc: track.
Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a If the elapsed track time has passed 8 sec-
permissible disc, and onds, the function skips back to the begin-
Rafter you have switched to disc mode ning of the track. If the elapsed time is
shorter, it will skip to the start of the pre-
(audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode)
vious track.
(Y page 243)
Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded If the Random Tracks or Random Folder
by the drive. Loading may take some time, playback option has been selected, the
depending on the number of folders and track order is random.
tracks.
Selecting by track list
In audio CD mode, the track list contains all
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or tracks on the disc currently playing.
MP3 mode
In audio DVD mode, the track list contains all
X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 242). tracks in the currently active group; see "Set-
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads ting the audio format" (Y page 197).
the inserted disc. In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks
X Select Disc in the menu using the in the currently active folder as well as the
9=; buttons on the remote folder structure, allowing you to select any
control and confirm by pressing the 9 but- track on the MP3 CD.
ton. X Select Tracks (audio CD/DVD mode) or
The corresponding mode is switched on. Folder (MP3 mode) using
The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays the :=; buttons on the remote
the disc. control, and confirm by pressing the 9
i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result button.
in the elapsed time shown being different or
from the actual elapsed time. X Press the 9 button when the display/
selection window is active.
The track list appears. The # dot indicates
the current track.
X Select a track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Z
Making a selection by entering the track

number directly
X Press the h button on the remote
control.
The track entry display appears.
Example: track 2
X Press number button 2.
Example: track 12
X Press the corresponding number keys in
: Folder selection symbol
rapid succession.
; Current folder name
XWait for approximately three seconds after = Track symbol
making the entry.
X To switch to the superordinate folder:
You will hear the track which has been
select symbol : using the 9: but-
entered. The corresponding basic menu
then reappears. tons on the remote control and press the
i It is not possible to enter numbers that
The display shows the next folder up.
exceed the number of tracks on the CD or
in the currently active folder.
X With the display/selection window active,
press the = or ; button on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach
the desired position.
or
X Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached. : Folder selection symbol
; Folder symbol
X Select a folder using the 9: buttons
Selecting a folder and press the 9 button to confirm.
This function is only available in MP3 mode. You will see the tracks in the folder.
X Select a track using the 9: buttons
X Select Folder in MP3 mode using
the :=; buttons on the remote
The track is played and the corresponding
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
folder is now the active folder.
or
X Press the 9 button when the display/
selection window is active. Pause function
The folder content appears.
mode.
X To pause playback: select Ë using X Select an audio format using the

the :=; buttons on the remote 9: buttons and press the 9 button
control and press the 9 button to confirm. to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. X To exit the menu: press the =

X To continue playback: select Ì and or ; button.
The Ì display changes to Ë.
Playback options
Further information on playback options is
Stop function available in the "Audio" section
(Y page 198).
X Select CD
CD, DVD-A or MP3 using
mode.
X To interrupt playback: select É using
cates the option currently selected.
XSelect Normal Track Sequence
Sequence, Random
press the 9 button to confirm. Tracks or Random Folder using the
Playback continues from the point where it 9: buttons and press the 9 button
was interrupted. to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
X To stop playback: while playback is inter-
except Normal Track Sequence,
Sequence you will
rupted, select É again and press the
see a corresponding display in the display/
9 button to confirm. selection window.
Playback stops and returns to the begin-
i If you switch the data carrier which you
ning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
are currently listening to, the Normal
X To restart playback: select Ì and Track Sequence option is activated auto-
press the 9 button to confirm. matically. If an option is selected, it
Playback starts from the beginning of the remains selected after the Rear Seat Enter-
DVD. tainment System is switched on or off.
Setting the audio format Switching track information on/off

(MP3 mode only)
Further information on audio formats is avail-
able in the "Audio" section (Y page 197). If the function is switched on, folder and track
names are displayed.
X Select DVD-A using the :=;
If the function is switched off, disc and file
names are displayed.
9 to confirm.
X Select MP3 using the :=; but-
X Select Group using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm. tons on the remote control and press the
The list of available audio formats appears.
The # dot indicates the format currently
selected.
Z
246 Video DVD mode
X Select Display Track Information Switching to video DVD mode

using the 9: buttons and press the
X Insert a video DVD (Y page 242).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
The function is switched on O or off ª,
the disc.
If disc mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
Video DVD mode If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as
described in the following instruction.
Important safety notes X Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
G WARNING
control and confirm by pressing the 9 but-
ton.
If the video DVD fulfills the playback crite-
ria, the film either starts automatically or
the menu stored on the DVD appears. If the
DVD menu appears, you must start the film
Never open the housing. Always have main- manually.
X Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu.
General notes
Showing/hiding the control menu
DVD playback conditions
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs. There is a large variety of discs,
DVD authoring software, writing software and
writers available. This variety means that
there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat
Entertainment System will be able to play
video DVDs that you have copied yourself.
Further information can be found under video
(Y page 225). Information regarding
COMAND also applies to the Rear Seat Enter- Control menu displayed
tainment System. : Type of data medium
; Current title
= Current scene
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that cer- ? Track time
tain functions or actions described in this
section will be temporarily blocked or may not A Shows the menu
function at all. As soon as you try to activate X To show: press the 9 or : button
these functions or actions, you will see the on the remote control.
K symbol in the display.
Video DVD mode 247
X To hide: press the 9 or : button. Pause function

or X To show the menu: press the 9 button
X Wait about eight seconds. on the remote control.

or
X Select Menu while the control menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
X To pause playback: select Ë and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
Stop function
Example: menu shown X To show the menu: press the 9 button
: Video DVD options on the remote control.
; Pause function or
= Stop function X Select Menu while the control menu is
? Media selection shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
A Sound settings X To interrupt playback: select É and
X To show: press the 9 button on the press the 9 button to confirm.
remote control. The Ë display changes to Ì. The
or video image is hidden.
X Select Menu while the control menu is X To continue playback: select Ì and
shown and press the 9 button to confirm. press the 9 button to confirm.
X To hide: press the 9 button, select was interrupted. The menu is hidden.
Full Screen and press the 9 button to X To stop playback: while playback is inter-
confirm. rupted, select É again and press the
Playback stops and returns to the begin-
Fast forwarding/rewinding ning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
X Press and hold the E or F button on X To restart playback: select Ì and
the remote control until the desired posi-
tion has been reached.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
You see the control menu.
DVD.
Z
248 Video DVD mode
Selecting a scene/chapter
General notes
Observe the information on DVD video mode

(Y page 227).
Skipping forwards/backwards
X Press the = or ; button on the
remote control.
or
X Select DVD Functions and press the 9
The navigation menu (Y page 226) appears button to confirm.
for approximately eight seconds. X Select Title Selection and press the
Selecting a scene/chapter directly X To call up the selection list: press the
9 button.
These examples illustrate how to select
X Select a film/title.
scene/chapter 5.
X Option 1: while the film is playing, press
Option 2:
the h button on the remote control. Example: selecting film 2
X Press the corresponding number key, such X Press button 2.
as 5. After a brief pause, the second film is
played.
X Option 2: while the film is playing, press
the 9 button on the remote control and
show the menu.
DVD menu
X Select DVD-V and press the 9 button to
confirm. Calling up the DVD menu
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
button to confirm. itself. It is structured in various ways accord-
X Select Scene Selection and press the ing to the individual DVD and permits certain
9 button to confirm. actions and settings.
X Select 5 using the 9 or : button and In the case of multi-language DVDs, for exam-
press the 9 button to confirm. ple, you can change the DVD language in the
In both cases, playback will begin from the DVD menu.
fifth scene/chapter after a brief pause. X Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button
Selecting a film/title on the remote control to confirm.
Option 1: X Select DVD Functions and press the 9
X Press the 9 button on the remote control button to confirm.

and show the menu. X Select Menu and press the 9 button to
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button confirm.

on the remote control to confirm. The DVD menu appears.
Video DVD mode 249
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu X To skip to the end of a scene: select the
F menu item and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X To skip to the beginning of a scene:

select the E menu item and press the
Moving up one level in the DVD menu

X Show the DVD menu.
X Press the % back button on the remote
control or select the corresponding menu
X Select a menu item using the item in the DVD menu.
9:=; buttons on the or
remote control and press the 9 button to X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
confirm. press W the COMAND controller to con-
A menu appears. firm.
X Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button. X Select Go Up and press W to confirm.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System car-
ries out the action or shows a submenu. Back to the movie
X If available, additional options can now be
selected.
X Press the k button repeatedly until you
The Rear Seat Entertainment System then see the movie.
switches back to the DVD menu. or
X Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
i Menu items which cannot be selected are press 9 to confirm.
shown in gray.
X Select the Back (to movie) menu item in
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: the menu and press the 9 button to con-
Back (to movie),
movie) Play
Play, Stop
Stop, E, firm.
F or Go Up may either not function at
all or may not function at certain points in
the DVD menu. To indicate this, the K Setting the audio format
symbol appears in the display.
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the audio language
Stopping a film or skipping to the begin-
or the audio format. The number of settings
ning or end of a scene
is determined by the DVD content. It may also
X Select any menu item from the DVD menu. be possible to access the settings from the
The menu appears. DVD menu.
X To stop the film: select the Stop menu X Press the 9 button on the remote control
item and press the 9 button on the remote and show the menu.
control to confirm. X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button
on the remote control to confirm.
button to confirm.
Z
250 Operation with an active COMAND source
X Select Audio Language and press the 9 remote control and press the 9 button to
button to confirm. execute it.
A menu appears after a short while. A menu appears and the first entry,
The # dot in front of an entry indicates the Select, is highlighted.
Select
currently selected language. X Press the 9 button.

X Select a language using the 9: but-
X To exit the menu: press the = Operation with an active COMAND
source
or ; button.
Switching the function on/off in
COMAND
Subtitles and camera angle You can transfer an audio or video source
These functions are not available on all DVDs. selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat Enter-
The number of subtitle languages and camera tainment System. If you subsequently switch
angles available depends on the content of modes in COMAND, the new source will not
the DVD. It may also be possible to access be transmitted to the Rear Seat Entertain-
the settings from the DVD menu. ment System.
X Press the 9 button on the remote control X To switch on the function in COMAND:
and show the menu. switch to the desired audio mode in
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button COMAND, e.g. CD mode (Y page 191), or
on the remote control to confirm. show the menu in video DVD mode
(Y page 226).
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
button to confirm.
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ
X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The # dot in front of an entry
indicates the current setting.
X Select a setting using the 9: but-
X To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Interactive content
DVDs can also contain interactive content X Select Active Aud./Vid. Source For
(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may Rear and press W to confirm.
be able to influence events by selecting and
triggering actions. The type and number of In the status bar at the top, you will see the
actions depend on the DVD. headphones icon and the _ icon for the
X Select an action using the
source that has been switched on.
9;:= buttons on the
Operation with an active COMAND source 251
X To switch off the function in COMAND: Audio CD mode

switch on the desired audio mode in
X To select by skipping to a track: press
COMAND or show the menu in video DVD
the = or ; button.
mode.

X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
or
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ X Press the E or F button.
and turning cVd the COMAND controller The skip forward function skips to the next
and press W to confirm. track.
If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8
X Select Rear Audio/Video Off _ and seconds, the function skips back to the
press W the COMAND controller to con- beginning of the track.
firm. If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec-
onds, the function skips back to the begin-
ning of the previous track.
Selecting an active COMAND source
on the rear-compartment screen Additional setting option:
RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 240)
Loading the active COMAND source
Audio DVD mode
X To skip to the next/previous group:
press the : button on the remote
control.
X To select K L: highlight using the
= or ; button and press 9.
Additional setting option:
i Information on groups can be found under
X Select COMAND using the 9=; "Setting the audio format" (Y page 197).
9 to confirm. MP3 mode
The audio or video source selected in
X To select a track by skipping to a
COMAND is loaded in the Rear Seat Enter-
track: press the = or ; button on
tainment System.
the remote control.
When the loading process is complete, the or
audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
The skip forward function skips to the next
If Rear Audio/Video Off is activated in
track.
COMAND, the COMAND is off or there
is no active COMAND source message If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8
appears. seconds, the function skips back to the
beginning of the track.
If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec-
onds, the function skips back to the begin-
ning of the previous track.
Z
252 AUX mode
X To select a folder: press the : button Connecting AUX equipment

X Highlight one of the two folder symbols
AUX drive
with the = or ; button and press
The AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/

9 to confirm. DVD drive next to the CD/DVD eject button
Depending on your selection, the previous (Y page 236).
or next folder is selected and the first track
is played. Displaying AUX
Additional setting option: The AUX display jacks are on the side of the
RAdjusting the sound settings (Y page 240) screen (Y page 235).
Video DVD mode Audio and video connection

X To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right
9 button. signals into the corresponding L and R
The video image is played in full screen jacks.
mode. X Insert the video plug into the V jack.
Additional setting options:
RAdjusting the brightness, contrast and
color (Y page 241) Activating AUX mode
RChanging the picture format (Y page 241) AUX drive
X Select Aux in the menu using the
AUX mode
The AUX menu appears.
Introduction X Select Source from the AUX menu and
You can connect one external video source to press the 9 button to confirm.
each of the displays of the Rear Seat Enter- X Select Disc Drive Aux and press the 9
tainment System (AUX display) and also one button to confirm.
external video source to the rear-compart- You will hear and see the content of the
ment CD/DVD drive (AUX drive) with a sound external video source if it is connected to
and video signal. the CD/DVD drive and switched to play-
Please see the corresponding operating back. If no video image is available from the
instructions for information on how to oper- AUX source connected, you will see an
ate the external video source. audio menu.
For further details about external video sour-
ces, please consult an authorized Mercedes- Displaying AUX
Benz Center.
X Select the screen by turning the scroll
wheel on the remote control (Y page 235)
AUX mode 253
until "L REAR " (left screen) or "REAR R" Changing the picture format
(right screen) is highlighted in the window.
X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux
X Select Aux in the menu using the
in the AUX menu and press the 9 button

to confirm.
X Select 16:9 Optimized,
Optimized 4:3 or Wide‐
X Select Source from the AUX menu and
screen using the 9: buttons and
X Select Display Aux and press the 9 but-
The dot in front of a menu item indicates
ton to confirm. the current setting.
You will see and hear the content of the
video source if it is switched to playback. If
no video image is available from the AUX
source connected, you will see an audio
menu.
Adjusting treble and bass

X Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu
and press the 9 button on the remote
control to confirm.
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or

color
X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux
in the AUX menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X Select Brightness
Brightness, Contrast or Color
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
Z
254
255

Introduction ...................................... 256
Switching the SIRIUS Weather dis-
play on/off ........................................ 256
Displaying detailed information ...... 257
Selecting the area for the weather
forecast ............................................. 257
Memory functions ............................. 259
Weather map ..................................... 260
SIRIUS Weather
256 Switching the SIRIUS Weather display on/off
Your COMAND equipment i The rain radar cannot be displayed for

Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
These operating instructions describe all the i Hurricane: term used to describe the trop-
standard and optional equipment for your ical cyclones that primarily develop in the
COMAND system, as available at the time of Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific
going to print. Country-specific differences oceans. The wind speeds are above
are possible. Please note that your 74 mph (118 km/h). Five categories are
COMAND system may not be equipped with used to classify the strength of a hurricane.
Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical
cyclone that develops in the northwestern
Pacific. The wind speeds are in the category
Introduction
of a hurricane.
i This function is currently not available for
Canada.
SIRIUS Weather
Switching the SIRIUS Weather display

For the reception of weather forecasts via on/off
satellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Sat-
ellite Weather subscription. Activating
When the Call SIRIUS to activate sys‐
tem at 888-539-7474 message with the
SIRIUS device identification number appears,
you will first have to obtain access to the
weather service. A description of the proce-
dure can be found in the "Registering satellite
radio" section (Y page 183).
COMAND can receive weather forecasts via
satellite radio for the entire USA (including
Alaska and Hawaii). The received weather
data can be displayed as an information chart
(daily forecast, five-day forecast, detailed
information) or on the weather map.
The weather data received from a weather
station is stored in COMAND for one hour. It
can therefore be displayed again immediately
after restarting the engine (for example after
refueling).
The weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
Rrainradar
Rstorm Example: daily forecast as an information chart
characteristics
Rareas of high-pressure/low-pressure,
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
weather fronts
Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
Rwind direction and speeds
Selecting the area for the weather forecast 257
COMAND controller and pressing W to Deactivating

confirm.
The SIRIUS Weather basic display appears.
X Confirm SIRIUS Weather by pressing W. or
The information chart shows the daily fore- X Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND
cast at the current vehicle position. controller and confirm by pressing W.
Both options appear in the SIRIUS Weather
You see the following information: basic display.
Rthe date and time of the weather message
received last
Rinformation on the current weather (tem- Displaying detailed information
perature, cloud cover) and forecast for the
next 3, 6, 12 hours
Rthe current highest temperature and fore-
SIRIUS Weather
cast
Rthe current lowest temperature and fore-
cast
Rthe probability of rain
Besides the current temperatures, you can

display information such as wind speeds and
UV index.
X Select Info in the information chart by
press W to confirm.
Example: five-day forecast as an information chart The information chart shows detailed infor-
X To switch to the five-day forecast: con- mation for the selected area.
firm 5-Day by pressing W.
The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently Selecting the area for the weather
selected location. forecast
X To return to the daily forecast: confirm
Introduction
Current by pressing W.
You can select the following areas:
Rthe current vehicle position
Rvicinity of the destination
Ra winter sports area
Ran area within the USA
You can select an area in the information

chart (option 1), on the map (option 2) or from
the memory. To select from the memory you
must first save an area (Y page 259).
258 Selecting the area for the weather forecast
i COMAND receives weather forecast data

from the nearest weather station at the
selected location.
Selecting the location in the informa-

tion chart
Selecting a state (searching for winter sport areas)

SIRIUS Weather
"Selecting the area for the weather forecast" menu

X Select Position in the information chart
A menu appears. X To select winter sport areas: select In
X To select the current vehicle position: Winter Sports Areas in the menu, and
select Current Position and press W to confirm by pressing W.
confirm. X Select a state, e.g. Colorado
Colorado, and press
COMAND receives the weather data for the W to confirm.
current vehicle position from the nearest
X Select a winter sports area from the menu
weather station and displays it automati-
cally. and press W to confirm.
The weather data and other information is
X To select the vicinity of the destina-
displayed for the winter sports area that
tion: select Near Destination in the
has been selected. The data is supplied by
the nearest weather station.
The information chart shows the following
i You can select Near Destination once information (if available):
a route has been calculated (Y page 69).
Rskislopes/ski lifts
The menu item is otherwise grayed out.
Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening
Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth)
Rtemperature
Memory functions 259
Memory functions
Storing the area in the weather mem-
ory
For areas that are frequently called up, 10
presets (0 – 9) are available in the weather
memory.
X In the weather memory: select the area
for the weather forecast (Y page 257).
The selected area is shown at the top in the
Selecting a state (searching for an area) status bar.
X Select Position in the information chart
SIRIUS Weather
X Select Memory and press W to confirm.
X Select the preset by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
X Press and hold W the COMAND controller
until you hear a tone.
The area is entered on the selected preset.
XTo store rapidly: in the daily forecast
X To search for an area: select a state, e.g.
(Y page 256) press and hold a number key,
Florida and press W to confirm.
e.g. l, until the preset position number
X Select a category, e.g. Daytona Beach,
Beach is shown in the status bar in front of the
and press W to confirm. area name.
The information chart shows the weather i You can also use this function:
forecast for the selected area. The data is Rinthe five-day forecast (Y page 257)
supplied by the nearest weather station.
Rinthe detailed information view
(Y page 257).
Selecting the location in the weather
map
Selecting an area from the weather
X Call up the weather map (Y page 260). memory
X Move the weather map so that the cross-
X From the weather memory: in the infor-
hair is over the desired area (Y page 260). mation chart, select Position by turning
X Press W the COMAND controller. cVd the COMAND controller and press
The information chart shows the weather W to confirm.
forecast for the selected area. The data is X Select Memory and press W to confirm.
supplied by the nearest weather station.
260 Weather map
X Select a preset that contains an entry by Changing the scale

turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND
The weather data for the selected area is
displayed.
X Rapid selection: if there is an entry avail-
able in the weather memory, e.g. when the
daily forecast is shown, briefly press a num-
ber key, such as l.
The weather data for the selected area is
displayed.
X As soon as you turn cVd the COMAND

Weather map controller, you see the scale bar.
SIRIUS Weather

Calling up the weather map
Showing/hiding the menu in the

weather map
Example: weather map

XSelect Map in the information chart by turn-
W to confirm.
The weather map is shown on a 500-mi or
X To show: press W the COMAND controller
500-km scale. in the weather map.
X To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND con-
i For the map display, you can activate the
topographic map style (Y page 112). troller.
Moving the weather map

controller.
The weather map moves in the correspond-
ing direction under the crosshair.
Weather map 261
Selecting a weather station in the

map
X Move the weather map and crosshair to the
desired position (Y page 260).
The menu is shown.
X Confirm Display Weather by pressing
W.
COMAND receives the weather data for the
selected position from the nearest weather
station and displays it automatically as a
daily forecast.
SIRIUS Weather
Switching layers on the map on/off
You can switch on different layers, for exam-

ple to display the rain radar, weather fronts
and the course of tropical storms on the map.
X Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 260).
X Select Map Options by turning cVd the
confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select the layer by turning cVd or sliding
W to confirm.
Switch the display on O or off ª.
262 Weather map
Explanation of the layers on the weather map
Layer Map display Selectable

scales
Radar Map Shows the rain radar as a colored area on the map. All
For an explanation of the colors, see the legend
(Y page 265).
Storm Character‐ Shows the characteristics of a storm All
istics Characteristics are:
Rtornadic storm:
storm cell with strong winds (super cell), from
which a tornado can develop. Tornadoes are
also known as twisters.
SIRIUS Weather
Rcyclone:
storm cells from which a tornadic storm can

develop
Rhailstorm
Rthe likelihood of a hailstorm
Atmospheric Shows the position of high and low-pressure areas 200 miles
Pressure (H, L), weather fronts and isobars (200 km)
500 miles
(500 km)
Tropical Storm Shows the path/directional movement speed of a All
Tracks tropical storm with time and strength information
Winds Shows the wind direction and wind speed 5 miles (5 km)
Sample displays of weather data in Conditions: the Radar Map layer is active
the map (Y page 261) and weather data is available.
The precipitation radar legend can be called
up at (Y page 265).
Weather map showing the rain radar

Weather map 263
Displaying storm characteristics Example: weather map showing weather fronts

Conditions: the Storm Characteristics Conditions: the Atmospheric Pressure
layer is active (Y page 261) and weather data layer is switched on (Y page 261) and weather
is available. data is available.
SIRIUS Weather
The example shows hail showers and tornadic The example shows the position of high and
storms together with direction and speed of low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and
propagation. isobars.
The storms legend can be called up i Isobars are lines that show where the air
(Y page 265). pressure is the same.
Example: weather map with information on a Legend: weather fronts

cyclone
: Cold front (blue line with blue triangles)
controller and move the crosshair onto a ; Warm front (red line with red semi-circles)
corresponding symbol. = Stationary front (red-blue line with red
X Press W the COMAND controller. semi-circles and blue triangles)
The following information is shown (if availa- ? Occlusion (violet line with a violet semi-
ble): circle and triangles)
Rcharacteristicsof the storm cell
Rdate and time of observation (time stamp)
Rdirectional movement speed and path
i The directional movement speed is the

speed at which the storm cell moves.
264 Weather map
Weather Explanation
front
Cold front If a cold front moves in, the
weather remains changeable
and there are often rain show-
ers and thunderstorms. The
air temperature decreases.
Warm front This can mean longer periods
of rain and can lead to an
increase in cloud cover and a Information on a cyclone
slow increase in temperature.
You can select individual points (:, ; and
Stationary The weather front moves min- =) on the path and display further informa-
front imally. The weather remains tion on them.
SIRIUS Weather
changeable in this area. X In the map, slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the
Occlusion This occurs when a faster cold COMAND controller and slide the crosshair
front reaches an advancing to :, ; or =.
warm front and combines X Press W the COMAND controller.
with it. The weather remains
Showing information (if available):
changeable and rainy within
an occlusion. Rname of the tropical storm and category
RTime stamp
Rdirectional movement speed and path
(Wind
Wind)
Rmaximum wind speed (Max. Max. Wind Speed)
Speed
i The directional movement speed is the
speed at which the storm cell of a tropical
storm moves.
A tropical storm is separated into different
categories according to the location at which
it develops.
Example: weather map showing the progress of a Region of origin Category
tropical storm
: Position on the forecast path
Atlantic, North and Tropical Low
South Pacific Pressure System
; Current position of the cyclone Oceans
= Position on the previous path
Atlantic, North and Tropical Rain
Conditions: the Tropical Storm Tracks South Pacific Zone
layer is switched on (Y page 261) and weather Oceans
data is available.
A dotted line shows the previous path and the Atlantic, North and Tropical Storm
forecast path of a tropical low-pressure area South Pacific
(cyclone). Oceans
Weather map 265
Region of origin Category Legend (precipitation radar and

storms)
Atlantic, North and Hurricane Cate‐
South Pacific gory 1 to Hurri‐
Oceans cane Category 5
Northwestern Tropical Low
Pacific Ocean Pressure System
Northwestern Tropical Cyclone
Pacific Ocean
Northwestern Typhoon
Pacific Ocean
Northwestern Super-Typhoon X Display the menu on the weather map
Pacific Ocean
SIRIUS Weather
(Y page 260).
confirm.
X Select Legend and press W to confirm.
i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also

valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).
Precipitation type Color scale
Rain Seven color levels
from light (light
green) to heavy (red)
Mixed Light (light violet) to
heavy (violet)
Snow Light (light tur-
quoise) to heavy
(turquoise)
Time stamp
You can also see the time stamp for the

weather data on map scales of 50 miles and
smaller.
The weather map shows wind directions and
wind speeds.
266 Weather map
The time stamp shows when the weather data

was created by the weather station.
A time stamp corresponds to the time at the
vehicle's current position. The changeover
from summer time to standard time is per-
formed automatically.
(Y page 260).
confirm.
X Select Time Stamp and press W to con-
firm.
SIRIUS Weather
Changing to the information chart

(Y page 260).
X Select Display Weather and press W to
confirm.
267
268

Comand PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Comand PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

First, familiarize yourself with your COMAND

Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 19

Operating safety ................................. 14 System settings .................................. 41

Vehicle functions ................................ 49

Telephone .......................................... 123

Online and Internet functions .......... 157

Audio .................................................. 177

Video .................................................. 223

Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 233

SIRIUS Weather ................................ 255

1, 2, 3 ... Audio format, setting

MP3 ............................................... 198 DVD

Selecting categories ...................... 216 N

Setting route options (avoiding: Selecting as the destination ............. 85

Rear Seat Entertainment System Lane recommendations ................... 90

Setting the text reader speed ............ 44 System settings

Weather map (SIRIUS)

Declarations of conformity i Roof antenna functionality (telephone,

A wide range of electronic components in

RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-

Your COMAND equipment

These operating instructions describe all

For safety reasons, some COMAND functions

Your COMAND equipment .................. 20

Your COMAND equipment You can call up the main functions:

standard and optional equipment for your display

COMAND operating system

: COMAND display (Y page 21)

(available depending on the vehicle model)

Navi Audio Telephone Video System Symbol ®

System menu overview

System Time SPLITVIEW Consump- Seat Display off

Switching the COMAND display on/off

COMAND control panel

Function Page Function Page

• Selects stations via the I Calls up the system menu 42

COMAND controller You can:

i If your vehicle does not have the seat

Using COMAND Selecting the menu of a main function

Address entry menu

Switching navigation announcements

You can now set the treble, bass and bal-

Adjusting the volume for phone calls

Adjusting balance and fader

You can make various sound settings for the

harman/kardon® Logic 7® Surround when Logic7® is switched on, the balance

You will achieve the best sound results by

Bang & Olufsen sound system

X Repeat the process until the name has

Example: entering characters its one by one in the corresponding data

Switching data fields

: * To switch the character bar to upper-

Option 2: XSelect the p symbol and press W to

press W to confirm. ROther (special characters such as @, €,

Further functions available in the

to create a new entry (Y page 139): ton on the control panel.

firm. turning cVd the COMAND controller and

X To delete an entry: press and hold the

X Wait until the character display goes out.

Switching SPLITVIEW on/off side are saved for approximately 30 minutes

Transferring the driver's website